Nissan Tiida C11 2010 Engine Control System PDF

ENGINE
EC
A
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
HR16DE THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION F
LEARNING : Description .........................................25
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 15 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement ..............25 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........15
Work Flow ............................................................... 15 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ................................25
Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................ 18 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description .........25
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair H
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................20 Requirement ............................................................26
BASIC INSPECTION ................................................. 20 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Require- I
CLEAR .......................................................................27
ment ........................................................................ 20 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Description ................................................27
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING J
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 23
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement .....................27
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 23 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 29
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING K
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 23 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 29
System Diagram .....................................................29
IDLE SPEED .............................................................. 24 L
System Description ..................................................30
IDLE SPEED : Description ...................................... 24
Component Parts Location ....................................30
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement ........... 24
Component Description ...........................................34
IGNITION TIMING ...................................................... 24 M
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 36
IGNITION TIMING : Description .............................. 24
System Diagram .....................................................36
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement.... 24
Component Parts Location ....................................39 N
VIN REGISTRATION ................................................. 24
VIN REGISTRATION : Description ......................... 24 Component Description ...........................................43
VIN REGISTRATION : Special Repair Require-
ment ........................................................................ 25
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ........................ 45 O
System Diagram .....................................................45
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION System Description ..................................................45
LEARNING ................................................................ 25 Component Parts Location ....................................46
Component Description ...........................................50 P
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
LEARNING : Description ......................................... 25
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .............. 52
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement .............. 25 System Diagram ......................................................52
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARN- Component Parts Location ....................................53
ING ............................................................................. 25 Component Description ...........................................57
Revision: January 2010 EC-1 2010 Versa

CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 59 P0011 IVT CONTROL ...................................... 126
System Description ................................................. 59 DTC Logic ............................................................. 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127
COOLING FAN CONTROL ............................... 60 Component Inspection .......................................... 128
System Diagram ..................................................... 60
System Description ................................................. 60 P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER .......... 130
Component Parts Location ................................... 62 Description ............................................................ 130
Component Description .......................................... 66 DTC Logic ............................................................. 130
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 131
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............... 68 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131
System Diagram ..................................................... 68 Component Inspection .......................................... 133
System Description ................................................. 68
Component Parts Location ................................... 72 P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ....................... 134
Component Description ......................................... 76 Description ............................................................ 134
DTC Logic ............................................................. 134
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ................. 78 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 135
System Diagram ..................................................... 78 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135
System Description ................................................. 78 Component Inspection .......................................... 137
Component Parts Location ................................... 79
Component Description .......................................... 83 P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...... 138
Description ............................................................ 138
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ..... 84 DTC Logic ............................................................. 138
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 84 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 139
CONSULT-III Function ........................................... 98 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 139
Diagnosis Tool Function ......................................104 Component Inspection .......................................... 140
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 106 P0101 MAF SENSOR ....................................... 142
Description ............................................................ 142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION DTC Logic ............................................................. 142
VALUE ............................................................. 106 Component Function Check ................................. 143
Description .............................................................106 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 145
Component Function Check ..................................106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................107 Component Inspection .......................................... 147
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 150
INCIDENT ........................................................ 114 Description ............................................................ 150
Description .............................................................114 DTC Logic ............................................................. 150
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................114 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 151
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 115
Component Inspection .......................................... 153
Wiring Diagram ......................................................115
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................115 P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 156
Ground Inspection .................................................119 Description ............................................................ 156
DTC Logic ............................................................. 156
U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 120
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 157
Description .............................................................120
DTC Logic ..............................................................120
Wiring Diagram ......................................................121
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................121 P0116 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 159
Description ............................................................ 159
DTC Logic ............................................................. 159
Description .............................................................122
DTC Logic ..............................................................122
Wiring Diagram ......................................................123
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................123 P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ........................... 161
Description ............................................................ 161
DTC Logic ............................................................. 161
Description .............................................................124
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 162
DTC Logic ..............................................................124
Wiring Diagram ......................................................125
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................125

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................. 165 Component Function Check .................................. 207
Description ............................................................ 165 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 209 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 165 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 209
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 166 Component Inspection ........................................... 212
Component Inspection .......................................... 168 P0139 HO2S2 .................................................. 215 EC
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 168 Description ............................................................. 215
DTC Logic .............................................................. 215
P0125 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 169 Component Function Check .................................. 216 C
Description ............................................................ 169 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 218
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170 Component Inspection ........................................... 220 D
P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
P0127 IAT SENSOR ......................................... 172 TION ................................................................ 223
Description ............................................................ 172 DTC Logic .............................................................. 223 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 172 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 225
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 225
Component Inspection .......................................... 173 F
P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .................. 174 TION ................................................................ 229
DTC Logic ............................................................. 174 DTC Logic .............................................................. 229
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 174 G
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 231
Component Inspection .......................................... 175 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 231
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 176 P0181 FTT SENSOR ....................................... 234 H
Description ............................................................ 176 Description ............................................................. 234
Component Function Check .................................. 177 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 236 I
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 179 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 179 Component Inspection ........................................... 238
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 182 P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 239 J
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 184 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 240 K
Component Inspection ........................................... 242
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 187
Description ............................................................ 187 P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 243 L
DTC Logic ............................................................. 187 Description ............................................................. 243
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189 DTC Logic .............................................................. 243
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 189 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 244 M
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 192 Component Inspection ........................................... 246
Description ............................................................ 192 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 246
DTC Logic ............................................................. 192 N
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 194 P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MIS-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195 FIRE ................................................................. 247
DTC Logic .............................................................. 247 O
P0137 HO2S2 ................................................... 198 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 248
Description ............................................................ 198
DTC Logic ............................................................. 198 P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 253
Component Function Check .................................. 199 P
Description ............................................................. 253
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 201 DTC Logic .............................................................. 253
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 201 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 254
Component Inspection .......................................... 203 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254
P0138 HO2S2 ................................................... 206
Description ............................................................ 206 P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ........................... 257

DTC Logic ..............................................................257 P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES-
Wiring Diagram ......................................................258 SURE SENSOR ................................................ 306
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................259 Description ............................................................ 306
Component Inspection ...........................................261 DTC Logic ............................................................. 306
P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ...................... 262 Component Inspection .......................................... 308
Description .............................................................262
DTC Logic ..............................................................262 P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES-
Wiring Diagram ......................................................264 SURE SENSOR ................................................ 309
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 311
P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 267
DTC Logic ..............................................................267
Component Function Check ..................................268
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................269 P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES-
P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................. 272 SURE SENSOR ................................................ 316
Description ............................................................ 316
DTC Logic ..............................................................272
DTC Logic ............................................................. 316
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................274 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 318
Component Inspection (Drain filter) .......................277 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 318
P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................. 278
DTC Logic ..............................................................278
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................279 DTC Logic ............................................................. 323
Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap) ..................283 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 324
Component Inspection (Drain filter) .......................283 Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap) ................. 327
Component Inspection (Drain filter) ...................... 328
P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....................... 285
DTC Logic ............................................................. 329
Description .............................................................285
Component Function Check ................................. 331
DTC Logic ..............................................................285
Wiring Diagram ......................................................287
Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap) ................. 334
Component Inspection ...........................................290
P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................... 336
P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
Description ............................................................ 336
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...... 291 DTC Logic ............................................................. 336
Description .............................................................291
DTC Logic ..............................................................291
Wiring Diagram ......................................................292 P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................... 337
Component Function Check ................................. 337
P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 338
VALVE ............................................................. 295
Description .............................................................295 P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............ 339
DTC Logic ..............................................................295 Description ............................................................ 339
Wiring Diagram ......................................................296 DTC Logic ............................................................. 339
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................296 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 339
P0500 VSS ........................................................ 341
P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL Description ............................................................ 341
VALVE ............................................................. 300 DTC Logic ............................................................. 341
Description .............................................................300 Component Function Check ................................. 342
DTC Logic ..............................................................300 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 342
Wiring Diagram ......................................................302
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................302 P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................... 343
Component Inspection ...........................................304 Description ............................................................ 343
DTC Logic ............................................................. 343
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 343 DTC Logic .............................................................. 372
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 372 A
P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................... 345
Description ............................................................ 345 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 373
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 345 DTC Logic .............................................................. 373 EC
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 374
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................... 347 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 374
Description ............................................................ 347 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 376 C
DTC Logic ............................................................. 347
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 347 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
TOR RELAY .................................................... 377 D
P0605 ECM ....................................................... 349 Description ............................................................. 377
Description ............................................................ 349 DTC Logic .............................................................. 377
DTC Logic ............................................................. 349 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 378
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 350 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 378 E
P0607 ECM ....................................................... 351 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL

Description ............................................................ 351 FUNCTION ...................................................... 381
DTC Logic ............................................................. 351 F
Description ............................................................. 381
DTC Logic .............................................................. 381
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................. 352 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 382
G
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 353 Component Inspection ........................................... 385
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 353 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 385
H
P0850 PNP SWITCH ........................................ 356 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 386
DTC Logic ............................................................. 356 DTC Logic .............................................................. 386 I
Component Function Check .................................. 357 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 387
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 358 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 387
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 358 Component Inspection ........................................... 388
Special Repair Requirement .................................. 389 J
P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .................. 361
DTC Logic ............................................................. 361 P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ..................................................... 390 K
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 362 Description ............................................................. 390
Component Function Check .................................. 362 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 390
L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 363 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 391
P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................... 366 P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 392
Description ............................................................ 366 Description ............................................................. 392 M
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 367 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393 N
P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 368 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 395
Description ............................................................ 368
DTC Logic ............................................................. 368 P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 396 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 368 Description ............................................................. 396
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 369 DTC Logic .............................................................. 396
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 397 P
P1421 COLD START CONTROL ..................... 370 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 397
Description ............................................................ 370 Component Inspection ........................................... 399
DTC Logic ............................................................. 370 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 400
P2135 TP SENSOR ......................................... 401
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY Description ............................................................. 401
SPEED SENSOR) ............................................ 372 DTC Logic .............................................................. 401
Description ............................................................ 372
Wiring Diagram ......................................................402 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOV-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................402 ERY (ORVR) ..................................................... 443
Special Repair Requirement ..................................404 Component Function Check ................................. 443
P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 405 Component Inspection (Refueling EVAP vapor cut
Description .............................................................405
valve) .................................................................... 446
DTC Logic ..............................................................405
Wiring Diagram ......................................................406
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................406 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 449
Special Repair Requirement ..................................409 Component Inspection .......................................... 449
P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 410 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 450
Description .............................................................410 Description ............................................................ 450
DTC Logic ..............................................................410 Component Function Check ................................. 450
Wiring Diagram ......................................................411 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 451
COOLING FAN ................................................ 415 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 454
Description .............................................................415
Component Function Check ..................................415 ECM .................................................................. 454
Wiring Diagram ......................................................416 Reference Value ................................................... 454
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................417 Wiring Diagram — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Inspection ...........................................419 — .......................................................................... 464
Fail Safe ............................................................... 465
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 421 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 467
Description .............................................................421 DTC Index ............................................................ 468
Component Function Check ..................................421 How to Set SRT Code ....................................... 471
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................421 How to Erase Permanent DTC ............................. 473
Test Value and Test Limit ..................................... 477
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 423
Description .............................................................423 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 484
Wiring Diagram ......................................................424 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .... 484
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................424 Symptom Table ..................................................... 484
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 488
FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 427 Description ............................................................ 488
Description .............................................................427
Component Function Check ..................................427 PRECAUTION ........................................... 489
Wiring Diagram ......................................................428
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................428 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 489
Component Inspection ...........................................430 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
IGNITION SIGNAL ........................................... 432 SIONER" ............................................................... 489
Description .............................................................432 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
Component Function Check ..................................432 tion After Battery Disconnect ................................ 489
Wiring Diagram ......................................................433 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 490
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................434 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power A/T ........................................................................ 490
Transistor) .............................................................437 General Precautions ............................................. 490
Component Inspection (Condenser-2) ..................438
PREPARATION ......................................... 494
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ............... 439
Description .............................................................439 PREPARATION ................................................ 494
Component Function Check ..................................439 Special Service Tools ........................................... 494
Wiring Diagram ......................................................440 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 494
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 496

FUEL PRESSURE ............................................ 496 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Inspection .............................................................. 496 Speed) ................................................................... 519 A
EVAP LEAK CHECK ........................................ 498 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ............ 521
Inspection .............................................................. 498 Input/Output Signal Chart ...................................... 521
System Description ................................................ 521 EC
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 500
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
EVAP CANISTER ............................................. 500 (ASCD) ............................................................ 522 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 500 System Description ................................................ 522
Removal and Installation ....................................... 500 Component Description ......................................... 523
Inspection .............................................................. 501
CAN COMMUNICATION ................................. 524 D
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS System Description ................................................ 524
(SDS) .......................................................... 502
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 525 E
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Description ............................................................. 525
(SDS) ................................................................ 502 Component Inspection ........................................... 527
Idle Speed ............................................................. 502 Exploded View ....................................................... 529
F
Ignition Timing ....................................................... 502 Removal and Installation ....................................... 529
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 502 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 530
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 502
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOV- G
MR18DE
ERY (ORVR) .................................................... 532
SERVICE INFORMATION ......................... 503 System Description ................................................ 532
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 532 H
INDEX FOR DTC .............................................. 503 Component Inspection ........................................... 535
U0101-U1001 ........................................................ 503
P0011-P0075 ........................................................ 503 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ....... 538
Description ............................................................. 538 I
P0101-P0128 ........................................................ 503
P0130-P0183 ........................................................ 504 Component Inspection ........................................... 538
P0222-P0420 ........................................................ 504 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
P0441-P0463 ........................................................ 505 J
TEM-NATS) ..................................................... 540
P0500-P0643 ........................................................ 505
Description ............................................................. 540
P0705-P0734 ........................................................ 506
P0740-P0840 ........................................................ 506 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .. 541 K
P0850-P1574 ........................................................ 507 Introduction ............................................................ 541
P1610-P1615 ........................................................ 507 Two Trip Detection Logic ....................................... 541
P1715-P1805 ........................................................ 507 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ............... 542 L
P2100-P2A00 ........................................................ 508 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................... 565
OBD System Operation Chart ............................... 568
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 509
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ..................... 574 M
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Basic Inspection .................................................... 574
SIONER" ............................................................... 509 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ................... 578
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- Procedure After Replacing ECM ........................... 579 N
tion After Battery Disconnect ................................. 509 VIN Registration .................................................... 580
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 510 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ..... 580
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 580
A/T, CVT ............................................................... 510 O
Idle Air Volume Learning ....................................... 580
Precaution ............................................................. 510 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................. 582
PREPARATION ................................................ 514 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................. 585 P
Special Service Tool ............................................. 514 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction .............................. 585
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 514 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 590
Fail-Safe Chart ...................................................... 590
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 516
Symptom Matrix Chart ........................................... 592
Schematic ............................................................. 516
Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 596
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 516
Vacuum Hose Drawing .......................................... 602
Electronic Ignition (EI) System .............................. 519
Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 603

ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............605 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 650
ECM Terminal and Reference Value .....................605 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 651
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) .........................612 Component Inspection .......................................... 652
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................618 Removal and Installation ....................................... 653
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ......................................................................620 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER .............. 654
Description ............................................................ 654
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
VALUE ............................................................. 624 Mode ..................................................................... 654
Description .............................................................624 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 654
Testing Condition ...................................................624 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 654
Inspection Procedure .............................................624 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 655
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT Removal and Installation ....................................... 658
INCIDENT ........................................................ 632
Description .............................................................632 DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................632 VALVE .............................................................. 659
Component Description ........................................ 659
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 633 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ......................................................633 Mode ..................................................................... 659
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................634 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 659
Ground Inspection .................................................638 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 659
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 660
DTC U0101 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .... 639 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 661
Description .............................................................639
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................639
Removal and Installation ....................................... 663
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................639
Wiring Diagram ......................................................640 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .............................. 664
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................640 Component Description ........................................ 664
DTC U0140 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .... 641 Mode ..................................................................... 664
Description .............................................................641
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 664
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 664
Overall Function Check ......................................... 665
Wiring Diagram ......................................................642
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 667
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .... 643 Component Inspection .......................................... 670
Description .............................................................643 Removal and Installation ....................................... 671
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................643 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .................. 672
Wiring Diagram ......................................................644
Mode ..................................................................... 672
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ............................. 645 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 672
Description .............................................................645 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 672
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 674
Mode ......................................................................645 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 675
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................646 Component Inspection .......................................... 677
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................646 Removal and Installation ....................................... 678
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................647 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .................... 679
Removal and Installation .......................................648
DTC P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER. 649 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 679
Description .............................................................649 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 680
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 680
Mode ......................................................................649 Component Inspection .......................................... 682
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................649 Removal and Installation ....................................... 682
DTC P0116 ECT SENSOR ............................... 683 Removal and Installation ....................................... 709
Component Description ......................................... 683 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 683 DTC P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ............................ 710
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 683 Component Description ......................................... 710
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 684 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 710 EC
Removal and Installation ....................................... 685 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 710
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .................. 686 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 712 C
Component Description ......................................... 686 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 713
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 686 Removal and Installation ....................................... 715
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 687 D
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 688 DTC P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 ............................ 716
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 688 Component Description ......................................... 716
Component Inspection .......................................... 690 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 716 E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 716
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ..................... 691 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 716
Component Description ......................................... 691 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 718 F
Mode ..................................................................... 691 Removal and Installation ....................................... 721
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 691 G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 691 DTC P0137 HO2S2 ......................................... 722
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 692 Component Description ......................................... 722
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 693 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Inspection .......................................... 695 Mode ...................................................................... 722 H
Removal and Installation ....................................... 695 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 722
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ............................... 696 Overall Function Check ......................................... 723 I
Component Description ......................................... 696 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 725
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 696 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 726
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 696 Component Inspection ........................................... 728
J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 697 Removal and Installation ....................................... 730
Removal and Installation ....................................... 698 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ......................................... 731
Component Description ......................................... 731 K
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ................................ 699 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ......................................... 699 Mode ...................................................................... 731
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 699 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 731
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 699 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 732
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 700 Overall Function Check ......................................... 732
Component Inspection .......................................... 700 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 734
Removal and Installation ....................................... 701 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 735 M
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .......... 702 Removal and Installation ....................................... 740
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 702 N
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 702 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ......................................... 741
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 702 Component Description ......................................... 741
Component Inspection .......................................... 703 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 741 O
DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ............................. 704 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 741
Component Description ......................................... 704 Overall Function Check ......................................... 743 P
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 744
Mode ..................................................................... 704 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 745
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 704 Component Inspection ........................................... 747
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 704 Removal and Installation ....................................... 749
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 706 DTC P014C, P014D, P015A, P015B, A/F SEN-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 707 SOR 1 .............................................................. 750

Component Description .........................................750 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 789
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 789
Mode ......................................................................750 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 790
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................750 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 791
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................751 Component Inspection .......................................... 792
Wiring Diagram ......................................................753 Removal and Installation ....................................... 792
Removal and Installation .......................................757 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .................... 793
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
FUNCTION ....................................................... 758 Mode ..................................................................... 793
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................758 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 793
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................758 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 793
Wiring Diagram ......................................................760 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 794
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Removal and Installation ....................................... 798
FUNCTION ....................................................... 764
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................764 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .............. 799
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................764 Component Description ........................................ 799
Wiring Diagram ......................................................766 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................767 Mode ..................................................................... 799
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ............................... 770 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 799
Component Description .........................................770 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 800
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................770 Component Inspection .......................................... 803
Wiring Diagram ......................................................771 Removal and Installation ....................................... 804
Component Inspection ...........................................773 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
Removal and Installation .......................................773 TION .................................................................. 805
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .................. 774 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 805
Component Description .........................................774 Overall Function Check ......................................... 805
Wiring Diagram ......................................................775 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 810
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................775 System Description ............................................... 810
Component Inspection ...........................................777 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 810
Removal and Installation .......................................777 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 810
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .................... 778 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 811
Component Description .........................................778 Component Inspection .......................................... 814
Mode ......................................................................778 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 815
Wiring Diagram ......................................................779 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 816
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................780 Component Inspection .......................................... 821
Removal and Installation .......................................782 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............... 822
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER Description ............................................................ 822
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ....... 783 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................783 Mode ..................................................................... 822
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................783 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 823
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................784 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 823
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 825
DTC P0327, P0328 KS .................................... 789 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 826
Component Description .........................................789 Component Inspection .......................................... 829

Removal and Installation ....................................... 829 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 858 A
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 858
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....... 830 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 859
Description ............................................................ 830 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 860 EC
Mode ..................................................................... 830 Component Inspection ........................................... 865
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 831 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 866 C
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 832 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 866
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 833 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 866
Component Inspection .......................................... 834 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 867 D
Removal and Installation ....................................... 835 Component Inspection ........................................... 872
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CON- DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 873
TROL VALVE ................................................... 836 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 873 E
Component Description ......................................... 836 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 874
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Overall Function Check ......................................... 874
Mode ..................................................................... 836 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 875 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 836 Component Inspection ........................................... 880
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 837
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 881
Component Description ......................................... 881 G
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CON- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 881 H
TROL VALVE ................................................... 842 Removal and Installation ....................................... 882
Component Description ......................................... 842
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 883
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor I
Mode ..................................................................... 842
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 842 J
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 844
Component Inspection .......................................... 846 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .. 885 K
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 848 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 885
Component Description ......................................... 848 L
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation ....................................... 886
Mode ..................................................................... 848
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 848 DTC P0500 VSS .............................................. 887 M
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 848 Description ............................................................. 887
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 849 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 887
Component Inspection .......................................... 850 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 887
N
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 888
PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 851
Component Description ......................................... 851 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ............................... 889 O
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Description ............................................................. 889
Mode ..................................................................... 851 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 889
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 851 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 889
P
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 851 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 889
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 853
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 854 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ............................... 891
Component Inspection .......................................... 857 Description ............................................................. 891
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 891
PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 858 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 891

DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 893 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .................................. 921
Component Description .........................................893 Component Description ........................................ 921
DTC P0607 ECM .............................................. 895
Description .............................................................895 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ............ 923
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................895 Description ............................................................ 923
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................895 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 923
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................895 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 923
DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ........ 896
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................896 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .......... 925
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................896 Component Description ........................................ 925
DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ............................... 901 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 926
Component Description .........................................901 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 927
Mode ......................................................................901 Component Inspection .......................................... 930
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................901 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ............... 931
Overall Function Check .........................................902 Component Description ........................................ 931
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ......... 907 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 932
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................907 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 933
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .................. 908
Description .............................................................908
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................908 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SEN-
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................908 SOR .................................................................. 940
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................908 Component Description ........................................ 940
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ..... 909 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 940
Description .............................................................909
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................909 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR .............. 942
A/T ........................................................................... 942
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE. 910 A/T : Description ................................................... 942
System Description ................................................910 A/T : CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Mon-
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor itor Mode ............................................................... 942
Mode ......................................................................911 A/T : On Board Diagnosis Logic ............................ 942
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................911 A/T : Diagnosis Procedure .................................... 942
Overall Function Check .........................................911
Wiring Diagram ......................................................913 CVT .......................................................................... 942
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................914 CVT : Description .................................................. 942
Main 13 Causes of Overheating ............................917 CVT : CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data
Component Inspection ...........................................918 Monitor Mode ........................................................ 942
CVT : On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................... 943
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ................................. 919 CVT : DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................... 943
Component Description .........................................919 CVT : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 943
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................919 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 944
Removal and Installation .......................................920 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 944

On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 944 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 973
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 944 Component Inspection ........................................... 975 A
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 945 Removal and Installation ....................................... 976
Component Inspection .......................................... 947 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ................................ 977
Component Description ......................................... 977 EC
DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
MOTOR RELAY ............................................... 948 Mode ...................................................................... 977
Component Description ......................................... 948 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 977 C
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 977
Mode ..................................................................... 948 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 978
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 948 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 979 D
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 948 Component Inspection ........................................... 981
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 949 Removal and Installation ....................................... 981
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ............................. 982 E
DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON- Component Description ......................................... 982
TROL FUNCTION ............................................. 952 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ............................................................ 952 Mode ...................................................................... 982 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 952 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 982
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 952 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 983
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 953 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 984
G
Component Inspection .......................................... 957 Component Inspection ........................................... 988
Removal and Installation ....................................... 957 Removal and Installation ....................................... 988
H
DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .. 958 DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................... 989
Component Description ......................................... 958 Component Description ......................................... 989
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 958 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 958 Mode ...................................................................... 989
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 959 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 989
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 960 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 989
J
Component Inspection .......................................... 961 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 991
Removal and Installation ....................................... 961 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 992
DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CON- K
TROL ACTUATOR ........................................... 963 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 996
Component Description ......................................... 963 Component Description ......................................... 996
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 963 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 963 Mode ...................................................................... 996
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .................. 965 Component Inspection .........................................1002 M
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor ASCD INDICATOR .........................................1004
Mode ..................................................................... 965 Component Description .......................................1004 N
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 965 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 965 Mode ....................................................................1004
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 966 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1005
Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................1005 O
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL .......................1007
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor P
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .................. 970 Mode ....................................................................1007
Component Description ......................................... 970 Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................1007
FUEL INJECTOR ...........................................1009
Mode ..................................................................... 970
Component Description .......................................1009
Mode ....................................................................1009
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 972

Wiring Diagram ....................................................1010 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1029
Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................1011 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................1030
Component Inspection .........................................1013 Removal and Installation ......................................1032
Removal and Installation .....................................1013
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR .............1033
FUEL PUMP ....................................................1014 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1033
Description ...........................................................1014
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Mode ....................................................................1014 (SDS) ..............................................................1035
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1015 Fuel Pressure .......................................................1035
Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................1016 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................1035
Component Inspection .........................................1018 Calculated Load Value .........................................1035
Removal and Installation .....................................1018 Mass Air Flow Sensor ..........................................1035
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................1035
IGNITION SIGNAL ..........................................1019 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ..................1035
Component Description .......................................1019 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ...................1036
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1020 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .........................1036
Diagnosis Procedure ...........................................1023 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ......................1036
Component Inspection .........................................1026 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ....................1036
Removal and Installation .....................................1027 Throttle Control Motor ..........................................1036
Fuel Injector .........................................................1036
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .........1028 Fuel Pump ............................................................1036
Component Description .......................................1028

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [HR16DE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005398229
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSBIA0067GB

*1: Include 1st trip DTC.

*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1. Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment
when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-18, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet".)
2. Ask if the customer requests I/M examination.
Malfunction information, obtained>>GO TO 2.

No malfunction information, but a request for I/M examination>>GO TO 13.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-484, "Symptom Table".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and is any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-488, "Description" and EC-
465, "Fail Safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-488, "Description" and EC-
465, "Fail Safe".
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then make sure that DTC is
detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-467, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check Intermittent Incident according to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
EC
Do you have CONSULT-III?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9.
C
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using D
“SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-106, "Component Function Check".
Are they within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 9. E
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
F
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11. G
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-484, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in H
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
I
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. J
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnosis Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-
K
25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11. L
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check the voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-454, "Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART M
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment. N
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diag-
nosis Description".
O
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function P
Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6.

NO-1 >> No request for I/M examination from the customer: Before returning the vehicle to the customer,
always erase unnecessary DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). Refer to EC-
84, "Diagnosis Description".
NO-2 >> I/M examination, requested from the customer: GO TO 13.
13.PREPARE FOR I/M EXAMINATION
1. Set SRT codes. Refer to EC-471, "How to Set SRT Code".
2. Erase permanent DTCs. Refer to EC-473, "How to Erase Permanent DTC".
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000005398230
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the WORKSHEET
SAMPLE in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.

WORKSHEET SAMPLE
A
EC
L
MTBL0017

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398231
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK IDLE SPEED
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. A
3. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair
Requirement". For specification, refer to EC-502, "Idle Speed".
EC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
PBIA8513J
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING D
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-25, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require-
E
ment".
>> GO TO 5.
F
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
G
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING H
Perform EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. Then GO TO 4.
7.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN J
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-502, "Idle Speed". K
YES >> GO TO 10.
L
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the Following. M
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-262, "DTC Logic".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-257, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION O
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is rare.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to P
BL-249, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.

2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IGNITION TIMING : Special
Repair Requirement". For specification, refer to EC-502, "Igni-
tion Timing".
1 : Timing indicator
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 11.
MBIB1331E
11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
ment".
>> GO TO 12.
Perform EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 13.
13.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. Then GO TO 4.
14.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-502, "Idle Speed".
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IGNITION TIMING : Special
Repair Requirement". For specification, refer to EC-502, "Igni-
tion Timing".
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 16.
MBIB1331E
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-157, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation. Then GO TO 4.

17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-262, "DTC Logic".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-257, "DTC Logic".
EC
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
C
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
this is rare.) D
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-23, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
E
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
F
If ECM is replaced during this BASIC INSPECTION procedure, perform EC-23, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
G
>> INSPECTION END
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
H
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000005398232
When replacing ECM, this procedure must be performed. I

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000005398233
J
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS IGNITION KEY IDS
Refer to BL-249, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM VIN REGISTRATION L
Refer to EC-25, "VIN REGISTRATION : Special Repair Requirement".
M
>> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-25, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". N
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING O
Refer to EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
P
>> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> END

IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED : Description INFOID:0000000005398234
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398235
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION TIMING
IGNITION TIMING : Description INFOID:0000000005398236
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398237

1. Attach timing light to No. 1 ignition coil (1) wire as shown.
2 : Timing light
: Vehicle front
PBIB2955E
2. Check ignition timing.
>> INSPECTION END
MBIB1331E
VIN REGISTRATION
VIN REGISTRATION : Description INFOID:0000000005398238
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).

VIN REGISTRATION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398239
A
1.CHECK VIN
Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-43, "Model Variation".
EC
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM VIN REGISTRATION C
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
2. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. D
3. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
>> END E
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000005398240 F
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. G
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Re-

quirement INFOID:0000000005398241 H
1.START
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. I
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. J
>> END K
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000005398242
L
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connec-
tor of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. M
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement

INFOID:0000000005398243
N
1.START
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
O
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
P
>> END
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000005398244
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine idle speed
within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398245
1.PRECONDITIONING
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
• Selector lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- A/T models
• With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “TRANSMISSION”
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
• Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
- M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Refer to EC-25, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL
RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. Refer to EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSI-
TION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
1. Perform Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Refer to EC-25, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL
RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Perform Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. Refer to EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSI-
TION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
5. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
6. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
- Fully release the accelerator pedal.
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
9. Start engine and let it idle.
10. Wait 20 seconds. A
EC
SEC897C D
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING E
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifi-
cations.
F
ITEM SPECIFICATION
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G
Idle speed
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
M/T: 6 ± 5°BTDC (in Neutral position)
H
YES >> INSPECTION END
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I
Check the following
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
• Check PCV valve operation. J
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
YES >> GO TO 6. K
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L
Engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of
the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-106, "Description".
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and M
perform Idle Air Volume Learning again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle. N
>> INSPECTION END

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR O
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000005398246
P
This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc-
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000005398247
1.START
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST to erase the DTC P0102.
>> END

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005398248
EC
JMBIA2191GB

System Description INFOID:0000000005398249
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition timing control.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005398250
PBIB2939E
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
and spark plug valve
4. Knock sensor 5. Fuel injector 6. Cooling fan motor
7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
10. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator
temperature sensor) (with built in throttle position sensor
and throttle control motor)
13. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve

EC
L
PBIB2940E
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Electric throttle control actuator M
(with intake air temperature sensor)
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 6. Fuel injector
7. EVAP canister purge volume control N
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

PBIB2941E
1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R

4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Knock sensor
valve
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. PCV valve
Vehicle front

EC
E
JMBIA2192ZZ
1. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 2. Three way catalyst (Manifold) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2
F
4. Three way catalyst (Under floor) 5. Muffler
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
J
1. Exhaust manifold 2. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness K
connector
Vehicle front
L

AWBIA0044ZZ
1. Cooling fan motor harness connec- 2. Crankshaft position sensor 3. Stop lamp switch
tor
4. Brake pedal 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor
harness connector
7. Accelerator pedal 8. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 9. Fuel pressure regulator
harness connector (view with in-
spection hole cover removed)
10. Fuel pump
Component Description INFOID:0000000005398251
Component Reference
A/F sensor 1 EC-176, "Description"
A/F sensor 1 heater EC-130, "Description"
Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-392, "Description"
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-262, "Description"

Component Reference
A
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-257, "Description"
Cooling fan motor EC-60, "System Description"
Electric throttle control actuator EC-390, "Description" EC
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-161, "Description"
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-285, "Description"
EVAP canister vent control valve EC-295, "Description" C
EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-306, "Description"
Fuel injector EC-423, "Description"
D
Fuel level sensor EC-336, "Description"
Fuel pump EC-427, "Description"
Fuel tank temperature sensor EC-234, "Description" E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-198, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC-134, "Description"
F
Ignition signal EC-432, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-156, "Description"
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-78, "System Description" G
Knock sensor EC-253, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-142, "Description"
H
PCV valve EC-449, "Description"
Refrigerant pressure sensor EC-450, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-373, "Description" I
Throttle control motor EC-386, "Description"
Throttle control motor relay EC-377, "Description"
Throttle position sensor EC-165, "Description"
J

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
JMBIA2193GB
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T) & mixture ratio Fuel injector
Gear position control
Transmission range switch (A/T)
Battery Battery voltage*3
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
EPS control unit Power steering operation*2

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter
BCM Air conditioner ON signal*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the EC
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor. C
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below. D
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine E
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) F
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration G
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
H
PBIB2793E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. K
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sen-
sor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to L
EC-176, "Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mix-
ture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching M
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control N
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation O
- Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
- High engine coolant temperature P
- During warm-up
- After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
- When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally

designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out over time to compensate for continual deviation
of the short-term fuel trim from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ-
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the ignition order. This system is
used when the engine is running.
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals
of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

EC
PBIB2939E
M
and spark plug valve N
10. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator O
solenoid valve P

PBIB2940E
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Electric throttle control actuator
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

EC
L
PBIB2941E
1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R M

valve
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. PCV valve N
Vehicle front

JMBIA2192ZZ
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness
connector
Vehicle front

EC
L
AWBIA0044ZZ
1. Cooling fan motor harness connec- 2. Crankshaft position sensor 3. Stop lamp switch M
tor
harness connector
N
10. Fuel pump O
Component Reference

Component Reference
Fuel injector EC-423, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-198, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-156, "Description"

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA2194GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*2
J
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing Ignition coil (with power K
control transistor)
Knock sensor Engine knocking
L
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T)
Gear position
Transmission range switch (A/T)
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) M
Vehicle speed*1
Combination meter
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. N
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ignition order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the O
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. P
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage

The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
PBIB2939E
solenoid valve

EC
L
PBIB2940E
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

PBIB2941E

valve
Vehicle front

EC
E
JMBIA2192ZZ
F
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
J
connector
Vehicle front
L

AWBIA0044ZZ
tor
harness connector
10. Fuel pump
Component Reference

Component Reference
A
Ignition signal EC-432, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-142, "Description" EC
Vehicle speed sensor EC-341, "Description"
C

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
JMBIA2195GB
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner ON signal

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature IPDM E/R

↓
Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ↓
Compressor
EPS control unit Power steering operation
Vehicle speed*1
Combination meter
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.

• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low. A
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
EC
PBIB2939E
N
and spark plug valve O
10. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator P
solenoid valve

PBIB2940E
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

EC
L
PBIB2941E

valve
Vehicle front

JMBIA2192ZZ
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
connector
Vehicle front

EC
L
AWBIA0044ZZ
tor
harness connector
N
10. Fuel pump O
Component Reference

Component Reference

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA2196GB


IPDM E/R
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ↓
Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan
Cooling fan relay
Combination meter control
↓
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan motor
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed corresponding to vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure, air conditioner ON signal. Then control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation

COOLING FAN CONTROL
Models with A/C
A
EC
PBIB2483E F
Models without A/C
I
PBIB3335E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays via the CAN communication line. J
Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan speed
1 2 3 K
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
L
High (HI) ON ON ON

COOLING FAN CONTROL
PBIB2939E
solenoid valve

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
L
PBIB2940E
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
PBIB2941E

valve
Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
E
JMBIA2192ZZ
F
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
J
connector
Vehicle front
L

COOLING FAN CONTROL
AWBIA0044ZZ
tor
harness connector
10. Fuel pump
Component Reference
Cooling fan motor EC-60, "System Description"

COOLING FAN CONTROL
Component Reference
A
EC

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
JMBIA2197GB


EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
EVAP control system pressure sensor Pressure in purge line
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
EC
PBIB3639E F
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
G
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is H
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING I

PBIB3330E
1. Intake manifold collector 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP service port
solenoid valve
4. EVAP purge resonator
Vehicle front From next figure

EC
L
BBIA0692E
1. EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister 3. EVAP canister vent control valve M
A. To previous figure
NOTE:
N
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

PBIB2939E
solenoid valve

EC
L
PBIB2940E
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

PBIB2941E

valve
Vehicle front

EC
E
JMBIA2192ZZ
F
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
J
connector
Vehicle front
L

AWBIA0044ZZ
tor
harness connector
10. Fuel pump
Component Reference

Component Reference
A
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-285, "Description"
EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-306, "Description" EC
Fuel tank temperature sensor EC-234, "Description"
Throttle position sensor EC-165, "Description" C

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
JMBIA2198GB

Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
timing control solenoid valve
Vehicle speed*
Combination meter
*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0060GB
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

EC
PBIB2939E
M
and spark plug valve N
10. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator O
solenoid valve P

PBIB2940E
solenoid valve
Vehicle front

EC
L
PBIB2941E

valve
Vehicle front

JMBIA2192ZZ
Vehicle front
PBIB2943E
connector
Vehicle front

EC
L
AWBIA0044ZZ
tor
harness connector
N
10. Fuel pump O
Component Reference
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-78, "System Description"

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005398277
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Permanent Diagnostic Trouble Code (Permanent DTC) Service $0A* of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
*: Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze 1st trip Freeze Permanent

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data DTC status
CONSULT-III × × × × × × — ×
GST × × × — × × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-465,
"Fail Safe".)
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Lighting Lighting displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking Blinking
up up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-468, "DTC Index".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

DTC and 1st Trip DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic A
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
EC
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec- C
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. D
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
DTC and 1st Trip DTC”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-468, "DTC Index". These items are
required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored E
non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without light-
ing up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not F
prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-15, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is G
duplicated, the item requires repair.
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem- H
perature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. I
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
J
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- K
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items L
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) M
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated N
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st O
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- P
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip
DTC”.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III displays the DTC in “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT” mode.

Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
With GST
GST (Generic Scan Tool) displays the DTC in Diagnostic Service $03.
Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
NOTE:
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST and the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if available) is
recommended.
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at
least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (EC-468, "DTC Index"), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
With GST
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.

In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains A
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
EC
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con- C
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE: D
If permanent DTC is stored or MIL illuminates during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also
returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is
important to check SRT (“CMPLT”), DTC (No DTCs) and permanent DTC (No permanent DTCs) before the
inspection. E
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
F
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-III indication) Priority* DTC No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420 G
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
1 EVAP control system P0442
H
HO2S 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137 I
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138
J
EGR/VVT SYSTEM 3 Intake value timing control function P0011
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE), one by one based on the
priority for models with CONSULT-III.
K
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and L
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result M
Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
N
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” O
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”

NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure

If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next figure. A
EC
JSBIA0065GB
M
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose N
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
NOTE:
• Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item. O
• “SRT STATUS” provides the presence or absence of permanent DTCs stored in ECM memory.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) P
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.

• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
PERMANENT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (PERMANENT DTC)

Permanent DTC is defined in SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 Service $0A.
ECM stores a DTC issuing a command of turning on MIL as a permanent DTC and keeps storing the DTC as
a permanent DTC until ECM judges that there is no presence of malfunction.
Permanent DTCs cannot be erased by using the Erase function of CONSULT-III or Generic Scan Tool (GST)
and by disconnecting the battery to shut off power to ECM. This prevents a vehicle from passing the state
emission inspection without repairing a malfunctioning part.
When not passing the state emission inspection due to more than one permanent DTC, permanent DTCs
should be erased, referring to this manual.
NOTE:
• The important items in state emission inspection are that MIL is not ON, SRT test items are set, and perma-
nent DTCs are not included.
• Permanent DTCs do not apply for regions that permanent DTCs are not regulated by law.
Permanent DTC Item
For permanent DTC items, MIL turns on. Refer to EC-468, "DTC Index".
Permanent DTC Set Timing
The setting timing of permanent DTC is stored in ECM with the lighting of MIL when a DTC is confirmed.
Permanent DTC Service Procedure

EC
H
JSBIA0066GB
How to Display Permanent DTC Status

I
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. J
5. Select “PERMANENT DTC STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE: K
Permanent DTCs stored in ECM memory are displayed on the CONSULT-III screen to show if a driving
pattern required for erasing permanent DTCs is complete (CMPLT) or incomplete (INCMP).
CAUTION:
Since the “PERMANENT DTC STATUS” screen displays the previous trip information, repeat the L
following twice to update the information: “Ignition switch OFF”, “Wait for more than 10 seconds”
and “Ignition switch ON”.
M
JSBIA0062GB

WITH GST
5. Select Service $0A with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Description
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to EC-439, "Component Func-
tion Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
On Board Diagnostic System Function

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function

Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive

WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up
to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EC-
439, "Description".
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning

MIL Condition A
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
EC
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. C
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- D
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
E
M
JMBIA1140GB
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes as per the following.
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F N
Flashes 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16
The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-sec- O
onds) - OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. P
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-468, "DTC Index")
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NOTE:

a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
- Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL start blinking during this period. This
blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
PBIB0092E
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to “HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
OBD System Operation Chart
Relationship Between MIL, 1st Trip DTC, DTC and Detectable Items
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on.
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Summary Chart
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)

For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”. A
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
EC
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”,
“Fuel Injection System” C
SEF392S O
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
P
stored in ECM.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with-
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as per the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ± 375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1 ± 0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deteriora-
tion>”, “Fuel Injection System”

EC
L
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. O
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip P
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”

<Driving Pattern A>
JMBIA1920GB
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as per the following:
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000005398278
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work support
dications on the CONSULT-III screen.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self diagnostic result
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
Active test
some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECU Identification ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item

WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE A

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
EC
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
C
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing mixture ratio self-
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning value
FICIENT.
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak D
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW ON E
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM F
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” G
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE
INSTRUCTION.
NOTE: H
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BAT-
TERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
I
VIN REGISTRATION • IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing J
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE K

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-468, "DTC Index".)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data L
Freeze frame data

Description
item* M
DIAG TROUBLE
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-468, "DTC Index".)
[PXXXX] N
• “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1 O
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. P
COOLANT TEMP
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
• “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
short-term fuel trim.

Freeze frame data
Description
item*
• “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
ule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
FUEL SYS-B2
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
• These items displayed but are not applicable to this model.
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
COMBUST CONDI-
TION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks

• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft • If the signal is interrupted while the
position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is dis- value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
played. • When engine is running specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse
• When engine is running specification
B/FUEL SCHDL ms width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on
board correction.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correc- • This data also includes the data for
A/F ALPHA-B1 %
tion factor per cycle is indicated. the air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When engine is running specification
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by the sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sen- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
sor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined
by the ECM is displayed.
• The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the
A/F SEN1 (B1) V
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.
• The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is
HO2S2 (B1) V
displayed.

A
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way
RICH/ • When the engine is stopped, a certain
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way EC
catalyst is relatively large.
km/h or • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed
VHCL SPEED SE
mph signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
C
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from D
ACCEL SEN 2 displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
TP SEN 2-B1 played. E
ECM terminal voltage signal.
• The fuel temperature (determined by the signal volt-
FUEL T/TMP SE °C or °F
age of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the signal
F
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicat-
ed.
• The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure G
EVAP SYS PRES V
sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE V • The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis- H
START SIGNAL ON/OFF the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and played regardless of the starter sig-
battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM I
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF according to the accelerator pedal position sensor sig-
nal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner J
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF
switch determined by the air conditioner ON signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
position (PNP) signal.
K
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (de-
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF termined by the signal sent from EPS control unit) is
indicated.
L
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load
signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or light-
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
ing switch is in 2nd position. M
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting
switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch sig-
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
nal.
N
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan

HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
O
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compen- • When the engine is stopped, a certain
INJ PULSE-B1 msec P
sated by ECM according to the input signals. computed value is indicated.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM ac- • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
cording to the input signals. value is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the cur-
CAL/LD VALUE %
rent air flow divided by peak air flow.
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM accord-
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s
ing to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor.

• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve control value computed by the ECM ac-
PURG VOL C/V %
cording to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value increases.
INT/V TIM(B1) °CA • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance angle.
• The control value of the intake valve timing control so-
lenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the in-
INT/V SOL(B1) put signals) is indicated.
%
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (determined
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF
by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition deter-
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF
mined by ECM according to the input signals.
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control
valve (determined by ECM according to the input sig-
VENT CONT/V ON/OFF nals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condi-
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF tion determined by the ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
• Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (determined
by ECM according to the input signals).
HI/LOW/
COOLING FAN HI: High speed operation
OFF
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sen-
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON/OFF sor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the in-
put signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the prima-
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
ry sped sensor signal.
km/h or • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed
VEHICLE SPEED
mph signal sent from TCM is displayed.
• Display the condition of Idle Air Volume Learning
YET: Idle air volume learning has not been performed
YET/CM-
IDL A/V LEARN yet.
PLT
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been per-
formed successfully.
km or
TRVL AFTER MIL • Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
mile
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value com-
puted by ECM according to the input signals.
A/F S1 HTR(B1) %
• The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the
value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sen-
AC PRESS SEN V
sor is displayed.
• Indicates the correction of factor stored in ECM. The
factor is calculated from the difference between the
A/F ADJ-B1 —
target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio
calculated from A/F sensor 1 signal.
• Indicates DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow responce)
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)* — INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
[INCMP/CMPLT] CMPLT: Self-diagnosis is complete.
*: The item is indicated, but not used.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

ACTIVE TEST MODE
A
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

EC
• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION • Fuel injector
• Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III. C
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see
IGNITION TIMING • Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. D
CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine. • Harness and connectors E
• A/C switch OFF • Compression
• Selector lever: P or N position (A/ • Fuel injector
POWER BALANCE Engine runs rough or dies.
T), Neutral position (M/T) • Power transistor
• Cut off each fuel injector signal • Spark plug
F
one at a time using CONSULT- • Ignition coil
III.
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors G
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” Cooling fan moves and stops. • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III. • Cooling fan motor
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors H
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
I
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
FUEL PUMP RELAY • Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III J
and listen to operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
• Change the EVAP canister Engine speed changes according • Harness and connectors
K
PURG VOL CONT/V
purge volume control solenoid to the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
valve opening percent using
CONSULT-III. L
FUEL/T TEMP SEN • Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped) M
Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
VENT CONTROL/V • Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
sound. • Solenoid valve
“OFF” using the CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.
N
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
V/T ASSIGN ANGLE • Intake valve timing control sole-
• Change intake valve timing us- CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
ing CONSULT-III. O
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

P
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
PERMANENT DTC STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
NOTE:
This mode is not used in regions that permanent DTCs are not regulated by law.

SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
PERMANENT DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to complete the driving pattern that is required for erasing
permanent DTC.
NOTE:
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page

P0442 EC-278
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM P0455 EC-323
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-329
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-192
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-176
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-206
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-198
HO2S2 (B1) P139 P0139 EC-215
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to C11 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
Diagnosis Tool Function INFOID:0000000005398279
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBD II scan tool) complying with SAE J1978/
ISO 15031-4 has several functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic Service Function

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-468, "DTC Index".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.

Diagnostic Service Function
A
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine EC
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can
be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature
C
Service $08 —
• Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF D
• Low fuel temperature
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID) E
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
Service $0A* PERMANENT DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to permanent DTCs which were stored by ECM.
NOTE: F
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
G
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector (1), which is located under
LH dash panel.
H
BBIA0734E
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in K

the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.) L
N
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure. O
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
P
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Description INFOID:0000000005398280
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the
value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have
one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005398281
1.START
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
- A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
YES >> END
NO >> Go to EC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005398282
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
P
PBIB2318E

PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-106, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.

NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because it may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is A
out of the SP value even a little.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 17. EC
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
SP value. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 6. G
1. Stop the engine. H
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within I
the SP value.
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine. K
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving L
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
M
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-496, "Inspection".)
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace and then GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
1. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-432, "Component Function Check".)
2. Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-423, "Component Function Check".)
3. Intake air leakage
4. Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-23, "Inspection".)
YES >> Replace fuel injector and then GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-176, "DTC Logic".
• For DTC P2A00, refer to EC-410, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. A
>> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” EC
1. Start engine.
C
the SP value.
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-484, "Symptom Table".
17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E
SP value.
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 18.
18.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity H
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc. I
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc. J
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

K
19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts L
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
M
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. N
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value. O
NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value: GO TO 21. P
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
3. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-142, "DTC
Logic". Then GO TO 29.
NO >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform EC-23, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 29.
• Crushed air ducts
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
SP value.
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27.
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 28.
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts

• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
A
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” EC
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? C
30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? E
F

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent
Incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation

2 The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT screen shows time data other than 0 or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
1.INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs.
Refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description", “DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA”, “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip
DTC”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-119, "Ground Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
4.CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-22, "How to Check Terminal", “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005398285
EC
P
BBWA2625E
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and
ground.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E16 93 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9561J

• Harness connectors M69, E7
• 10A fuse (No. 6)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION-I
2. Check ground connections E15, E24. Refer to EC-119, "Ground Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
10
F10
11 Ground Existed
E16 108
3. Also check harness for short to power.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors F8, E8
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connectors.

3. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and A
ground.
IPDM E/R EC
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
C
YES >> Go to EC-434, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2658E D
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
E
ground.
F
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage G
E16 105 Ground will exist for a few seconds, then drop approxi-
mately 0 V.
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 14. PBIB3037E
NO-1 >> Battery voltage does not exist: GO TO 9.

NO-2 >> Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds: GO TO 11.
I
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and J
ground.
ECM K
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F10 32 Ground Battery voltage
L
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
PBIA9562J M
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
N
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E43.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
O
ECM IPDM E/R
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E16 105 E43 4 Existed P
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F10 32 E43 7 Existed
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 12.
• Harness connectors E8, F8
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
13.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Replace 20 A fuse.
14.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION-II
YES >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
10
F10
11 Ground Existed
E16 108
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> GO TO 16.

17.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
EC
Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000005398287
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can C
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even D
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. E
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. F
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution". G
L
PBIB1870E

U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005398289
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
• CAN communication line between
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
Lost communication with TCM and ECM
U0101 communication signal of OBD (emission-related
TCM (CAN communication line is open or
diagnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> EC-121, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END

EC
BBWA2626E
P
Go to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• CAN communication line between
Lost communication with BCM and ECM
U0140 communication signal of OBD (emission related
BCM (CAN communication line is open or
diagnosis) with BCM for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
BBWA2626E
P

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN • Harness or connectors
U1001 CAN communication line communication signal other than OBD (emission (CAN communication line is open or
related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. shorted)

2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?

EC
BBWA2626E
P

P0011 IVT CONTROL
P0011 IVT CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform the trouble diagnosis for EC-352, "DTC Logic".
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Intake valve control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0011
performance and phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4.2 msec
P or N position (A/T)
Selector lever
Neutral position (M/T)
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
YES >> Go to EC-127, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)


P0011 IVT CONTROL
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
A
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
CAUTION: EC
Always drive at a safe speed.
With GST C
YES >> Go to EC-127, "Diagnosis Procedure" D
E
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine.
F
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?
G
YES >> Go to LU-7, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
H
I
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-128, "Component Inspection". J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. K
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-261, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). M
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-266, "Component Inspection".
N
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
O
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
P

P0011 IVT CONTROL
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft (1) rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIA9557J

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-49, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-65, "Inspection", “INSPECTION AFTER INSTALATION”.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005398302
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals as per the following.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0574E
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

P0011 IVT CONTROL
2. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the A
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
EC
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control C
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA2108ZZ

NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031
heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0032
heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than between 11 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.

EC
AABWA0308GB
P
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and
ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• IPDM E/R harness connector E45
• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
F12 3 F10 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard
surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

Perform EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> Repair or replace. EC

1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 C

2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
D
3. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
E
3 and 4 1.98 - 2.66 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω F
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)

YES >> INSPECTION END G
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3309E
2.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 K

CAUTION:
• Discard any sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard L
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial M
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END N

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037
heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0038
heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
With GST
NO >> INSPECTION END A
EC
BBWA2628E

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0186E

• IPDM E/R connector E45
• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
F13 3 F10 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial
service tool).

>> INSPECTION END A

Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

D
3. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as per the follow-
ing. E
F
2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
G
NO >> GO TO 2. H
K
PBIB3310E

L
CAUTION:
surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. M
service tool). N
>> INSPECTION END

O

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
JMBIA0098GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• Harness or connectors
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
Intake valve timing control (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0075 through intake valve timing control solenoid
solenoid valve circuit circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.

EC
ABBWA0350GB
P
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.

4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve harness connector and ground.
IVT control solenoid valve

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0285E

• IPDM E/R connector E43
• Harness for open or short between IVT control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between IVT control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
IVT control solenoid valve ECM

Continuity
F23 2 F11 73 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I


valve terminals as per the following. A
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] EC
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0574E
D
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
2. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid E
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. F
NOTE: G
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA2108ZZ H
I

P0101 MAF SENSOR
P0101 MAF SENSOR
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
A)
ECM under light load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
Mass air flow sensor cir- • Harness or connectors
P0101
cuit range/performance (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to • Intake air leaks
B)
ECM under heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
• Intake air temperature sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
NO-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 5.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR FUNCTION
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure".

P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. A
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
EC
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
G
PBIB3457E
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. H
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm

I
TP SEN 1-B1 More than 1.5 V
Selector lever Suitable position J
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
CAUTION: K
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION B M
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-143, "Component Function Check".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this N
check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
YES >> INSPECTION END O
P
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION B
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.

P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC
BBWA2632E
P
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-142, "DTC Logic".
Which malfunction is detected?

P0101 MAF SENSOR
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and
ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

P0101 MAF SENSOR
MAF sensor ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 8. C
8.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
D
Check intake air temperature sensor.
E
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR F
YES >> GO TO 10. G
NO >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
H
YES >> GO TO 11. I
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
>> INSPECTION END

K
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I L

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. M
4. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.
N
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V O
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.3 V
MAS A/F SE-B1
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.9 V
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.3 V to Approx. 2.4 V*
P
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.

P0101 MAF SENSOR
ground.
ECM
Con- Termi- Ground Condition Voltage
nector nal
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
operating temperature.)
(MAF
F11 Ground 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to PBIA9564J
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
signal) normal operating temperature.)
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

MAS A/F SE-B1
Without CONSULT-III

P0101 MAF SENSOR
ground. A
ECM
Con- Termi- Ground Condition Voltage EC
nector nal
C
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
(MAF
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
signal) normal operating temperature.) D
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. E
NO >> GO TO 4. F
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III

With CONSULT-III G
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
I
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.3 V J
MAS A/F SE-B1
K
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. L
ground. M
ECM
Con- Termi- Ground Condition Voltage N
nector nal
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal O
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
(MAF
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
signal) normal operating temperature.) P
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
the heat loss.
PBIA9559J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
low input sent to ECM. • Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0103 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
high input sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
BBWA2632E
P
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.

P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and
ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.

MAF sensor ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 8. C
D
YES >> GO TO 9. E
Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I H

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. I
J

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V K
MAS A/F SE-B1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.3 V to Approx. 2.4 V* L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and N
ground.
ECM O
nector nal
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V P
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
(MAF
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III

MAS A/F SE-B1
Without CONSULT-III
ground.
ECM
nector nal
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
(MAF
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Approx. 2.4 V*
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III

5. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication. A

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 V EC
MAS A/F SE-B1
C
Without CONSULT-III D
E
ground.
F
ECM
nector nal
G
45 0.9 - 1.3 V
(MAF H
sensor 1.4 - 1.9 V
0.9 - 1.3 V to
Idle to about 4,000 rpm I
Approx. 2.4 V*
Is the inspection result normal? J
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
K

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 46
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing SEF012P
so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM
terminals, such as the ground.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0112 • Harness or connectors
sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Intake air temperature sensor
P0113
sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

EC
BBWA2633E
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector and ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F31 5 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as per the following.
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

1 and 2 Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200

P0116 ECT SENSOR
P0116 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant temperature
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
I
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transis-
tor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC K

NOTE:
If DTC P0116 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117,
P0118. Refer to EC-161, "DTC Logic".
L
Engine coolant temperature signal from engine M
Engine coolant temperature • Harness or connectors
coolant temperature sensor does not fluctuate,
P0116 sensor circuit range/perfor- (High or low resistance in the circuit)
even when some time has passed after starting
mance • Engine coolant temperature sensor
the engine with pre-warming up condition.
N
1.PRECONDITIONING
O
If DTC confirmation procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
P
>> GO TO 2.
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm for more than 10 minutes.
3. Move the vehicle to a cool place, then stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5.

P0116 ECT SENSOR
5. Soak the vehicle until the resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5
becomes 0.5 kΩ higher than the value measured before soaking.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during the soaking time.
NOTE:
Soak time changes depending on ambient air temperature. It may take several hours.
6. Start engine and let it idle for 20 minutes.

2. Check ground connections E15, 24. Refer to EC-119, "Ground Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
4. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals Condition Resistance

20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 kΩ
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2005E

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
A

SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
I
CAUTION:
J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P0117
Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor L
sensor circuit low input is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor • Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118
sensor circuit high input is sent to ECM.
M
1.PRECONDITIONING N
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

BBWA2634E

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. A
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
EC
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and
ground.
C
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F

3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. G
ECT sensor ECM

Continuity H
F6 2 F11 44 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END
N

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
P


20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into C
output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to D
driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC F

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-352, "DTC Logic". G
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor H
2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 (TP sensor 2)
2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
TESTING CONDITION: K
>> GO TO 2. L
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. M
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-166, "Diagnosis Procedure". N

BBWA2656E

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
EC
3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator har-
ness connector and ground.
C
Electric throttle control actuator
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- G
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM H

Continuity
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
I
YES >> GO TO 4. J
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- K
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM

L
Continuity
F7 3 F11 34 Existed
M
YES >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
O
YES >> GO TO 7. P
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-168, "Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END


3. Perform EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
5. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
ground.
ECM
Ground Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
More than
33 Fully released
0.36V
(TP sensor
1 signal) Fully de- Less than
Accelerator pressed 4.75V
F11 Ground
pedal Less than PBIB3038E
34 Fully released
4.75V
(TP sensor
2 signal) Fully de- More than
pressed 0.36V
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398348

Refer to EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> END

P0125 ECT SENSOR
P0125 ECT SENSOR
A

SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
I
CAUTION:
J

NOTE:
• If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0116, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0116. Refer to EC-
159, "DTC Logic".
L
• If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
M
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not

Insufficient engine coolant practical, even when some time has passed
(High resistance in the circuit) N
P0125 temperature for closed after starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
loop fuel control • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
• Thermostat
closed loop fuel control.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE O

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

P0125 ECT SENSOR
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
With GST
Is it above 10°C (50°F)?
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
2. Check 1st tip DTC.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine
because the test result will be OK.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
With GST
YES >> EC-170, "Diagnosis Procedure"

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-23, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END



P0125 ECT SENSOR
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure. A

20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 kΩ EC
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
C
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. D

P0127 IAT SENSOR
P0127 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
to the ECM.
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing SEF012P
so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM
terminals, such as the ground.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
P0127 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. • Intake air temperature sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 96°C (205°F)
- Turn ignition switch ON.
- Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
- Check the engine coolant temperature.
- If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 96°C (205°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.

P0127 IAT SENSOR
NOTE:
Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 96°C (205°F). A
4. Start engine.
EC
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
CAUTION:
6. Check 1st trip DTC. C
With GST
Is 1st trip DTC detected? D
E

F
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR H
YES >> GO TO 3. I
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
>> INSPECTION END K

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L

M
3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as per the following.
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

N
1 and 2 Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200

P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304. Refer to EC-247, "DTC Logic".
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
The engine coolant temperature does not • Thermostat
P0128 Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though • Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
the engine has run long enough. • Engine coolant temperature sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 56°C (133°F).
• Before performing the following procedure, do not fill with the fuel.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn A/C switch OFF.
2. Turn blower fan switch OFF.
4. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”
If it is below 56°C (133°F), go to following step.
If it is above 56°C (133°F), cool down the engine to less than 56°C (133°F). Then go to next steps.
6. Start engine.
7. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 56km/h (35MPH)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication increases to more than 75°C (167°F) within 10 minutes, turn igni-
tion switch OFF because the test result will be OK.
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK THERMOSTAT
EC
Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace thermostat.
D
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. E
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure. F

20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 kΩ G
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
H
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. I

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocar-
bon density in rich.
JMBIA0112GB
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
P0130
circuit or shorted.)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • A/F sensor 1
B)
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-III
2. Let it idle for 2 minutes.

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 7. A
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
1. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
EC
2. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
Does the indication fluctuates around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-I
1. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. D
2. Touch “START”.
3. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
E
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 mph)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec F
D position (A/T)
Selector lever
5th position (M/T)
G
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
CAUTION:
Is “TESTING” displayed on CONSULT-III screen? H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Check A/F sensor 1 function again. GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-II I
Release accelerator pedal fully.

NOTE: J
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Which does “TESTING” change to?
COMPLETED>>GO TO 6. K
OUT OF CONDITION>>Retry DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GO TO 4.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-III
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT” L
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
NO >> Go to EC-179, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

Perform Component Function Check. Refer to EC-177, "Component Function Check". N
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
O
P
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

With GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
3. Shift the selector lever to the D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully
until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (31 MPH).
CAUTION:
NOTE:
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times.
8. Stop the vehicle.

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
EC
AABWA0307GB
P

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3. PBIB3308E

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
F12 Ground Not existed
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 5.
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 6. A
NO >> Repair or replace.
EC
CAUTION:
surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. C
service tool). D
>> INSPECTION END

E

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
JMBIA0112GB
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately low.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0131
circuit low voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0 V. shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is the indication constantly approx. 0 V?

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
NO >> GO TO 3. A
With CONSULT-III EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. C
3. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec
E
Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. F
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
With GST G
H

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
AABWA0307GB

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
ground.
C
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

• IPDM E/R harness connector E45 G
• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
J
A/F sensor 1 ECM
Continuity
1 49
K
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector L
and ground.
A/F sensor 1 M
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
F12 Ground Not existed N
2
ECM O
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53 P
YES >> GO TO 5.
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen- EC
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor C
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current D
JMBIA0112GB E
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the F
(1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 J
signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause K
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0132
circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5 V. shorted.) L
• A/F sensor 1

1.PRECONDITIONING M
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. N
TESTING CONDITION:
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III P
With GST
Is the indication constantly approx. 5 V?

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
CAUTION:

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
1.
With GST
Is 1st trip DTC is detected?

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
EC
AABWA0307GB
P

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 2.
ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 5.
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 EC

CAUTION:
C
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial D
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END E

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
JMBIA0112GB
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1
• A/F sensor 1 heater
• The response of the A/F signal computed
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor • Fuel pressure
P0133 by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes
1 circuit slow response • Fuel injector
more than the specified time.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. EC
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on COUSULT-III?
C
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II D
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III?
OK >> INSPECTION END E
NG >> Go to EC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
1. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
- Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
- Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, go to EC-106, "Component Function Check". G
2. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
3. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. H
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, go to EC-106, "Component Function Check".
4. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III? I
5.CHECK AIR-FUEL RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE J
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST. K
3. Calculate the total value of “Short-term fuel trim” and “Long-term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 7. L
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M
• Incorrect fuel pressure N
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection O
• PCV valve
P
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
4. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
5. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
6. Check 1st trip DTC detected?.
AABWA0307GB

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
A
2. Check ground connections E15, E24. Refer to EC-119, "Ground Inspection". EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. C
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View". D
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK E
1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
F
PBIB1216E
I
Is exhaust gas leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO >> GO TO 4.
J
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected? K
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE L
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-27, "MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". M
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
N
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-223, "DTC Logic" or EC-229,
"DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
2. Turn ignition switch ON. P

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3308E

• 10 A fuse (No. 54)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 13.
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK PCV VALVE EC

Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
E
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 F
CAUTION:
• Discard any sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard G
service tool). H
>> INSPECTION END

I

P0137 HO2S2
P0137 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner con-
ditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-
cut.
SEF259VA
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0137
circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

P0137 HO2S2
EC
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. C
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. D
CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
G
>> GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK H
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. I
NO >> Go to EC-201, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
K
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. M
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground
under the following condition.
N
ECM
nector nal
O
50 Revving up to 4,000 rpm The voltage should be
F11 (HO2S2 Ground under no load at least 10 above 0.68 V at least once
signal) times during this procedure.
P
Is the inspection result normal? PBIB2996E

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

P0137 HO2S2
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground
ECM
Con- Ground Condition Voltage
Terminal
nector
50 The voltage should be
Keeping engine speed
F11 (HO2S2 Ground above 0.68 V at least once
at idle for 10 minutes
signal) during this procedure.

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
ECM
nector nal
Coasting from 80 km/h
(50 MPH) in D position
(A/T), 4th gear position
(M/T)
JMBIA2200ZZ

P0137 HO2S2
EC
BBWA2629E
P

P0137 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-223, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector and
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F13 4 Ground Not existed
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
P0137 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
EC
service tool).
C
>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
>> INSPECTION END

E
1.INSPECTION START F
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> GO TO 3.
H
With CONSULT-III
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with J
CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ± 25%.
K
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is + 25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is − 25%. N
NO >> GO TO 6. O
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I

Without CONSULT-III P

P0137 HO2S2
ECM
nector nal
The voltage should be
above 0.68 V at least once
50 Revving up to 4,000
during this procedure.
F11 (HO2S2 Ground rpm under no load at
The voltage should be be-
signal) least 10 times
low 0.18 V at least once PBIB2996E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
ECM
nector nal
50
Keeping engine speed during this procedure.
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
at idle for 10 minutes The voltage should be be-
signal)
low 0.18 V at least once JMBIA2199ZZ

NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III
ECM
nector nal
Coasting from 80 km/h above 0.68 V at least once
50
(50 MPH) in D position during this procedure.
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
(A/T), 4th gear position The voltage should be be-
signal)
(M/T) low 0.18 V at least once JMBIA2200ZZ

NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:

P0137 HO2S2
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial A
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END EC

P0138 HO2S2
P0138 HO2S2

ditions.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E
An excessively high voltage from the
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0138
circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

P0138 HO2S2
1.PRECONDITIONING A
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. D
4. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? E
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 5. F
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NOTE:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). G
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. H
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is more than 70°C (158°F).
I
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III. J
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. K
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III
NG >> Go to EC-209, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALUNCTION B AGAIN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). M
>> GO TO 3. N
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-209, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
NOTE:
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
P

P0138 HO2S2
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
nector nal
50 Revving up to 4,000 The voltage should be
F11 (HO2S2 Ground rpm under no load at above 0.18 V at least once
signal) least 10 times during this procedure.

NO >> GO TO 2.
ECM
nector nal
50 The voltage should be above
F11 (HO2S2 Ground 0.18 V at least once during
signal) this procedure.

NO >> GO TO 3.
ECM
nector nal
(M/T)
JMBIA2200ZZ

P0138 HO2S2
EC
BBWA2629E
P
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-206, "DTC Logic".
Which malfunction is detected?

P0138 HO2S2
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 9.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
P0138 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 EC

CAUTION:
C
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial D
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END E

Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION G
H
YES >> GO TO 10.
I
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-229, "DTC Logic". K
NO >> GO TO 11.
L
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector. M
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity N
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. O
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P

P0138 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 13.
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14.
CAUTION:
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
P0138 HO2S2
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with A
CONSULT-III.
EC
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is − 25%. E
NO >> GO TO 6. F

Without CONSULT-III G
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. H
I
ECM
nector nal
J

50 Revving up to 4,000 K

L
NO >> GO TO 4. M
under the following condition. N
ECM
Ground Condition Voltage O
Con- Termi-
nector nal
above 0.68 V at least once P
50
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
signal)

NO >> GO TO 5.
P0138 HO2S2
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III

ECM
nector nal
50
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
signal)

NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

P0139 HO2S2
P0139 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), EC

nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
ditions. D
SEF327R E

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the G
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
H
tion such as fuel-cut.
I
SEF302U
J
K
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139 between rich and lean than the specified
circuit slow response • Fuel pressure
time.
• Fuel injector L

M
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III? N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING O
P
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

P0139 HO2S2
7. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM THE RESULT OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
>> GO TO 3.
NOTE:

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Terminal
nector
50 Revving up to 4,000 The voltage should be above
F11 (HO2S2 Ground rpm under no load at 0.30 V at least once during
signal) least 10 times this procedure.

NO >> GO TO 2.

P0139 HO2S2
under the following condition. A
ECM
Con- Ground Condition Voltage EC
Terminal
nector
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
above 0.30 V at least once C

NO >> GO TO 3.
E
F
ECM
nector nal
G
signal) during this procedure. H
(M/T)
JMBIA2200ZZ
NO >> Go to EC-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". I

P0139 HO2S2
BBWA2629E

P0139 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
C
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-223, "DTC Logic" or EC-229,
"DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. E
F
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
F13 1 F11 59 Existed G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I
HO2S2 ECM J
Continuity
K
ground.
L
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F13 4 Ground Not existed M
ECM
Ground Continuity N
Connector Terminal
3. Also check harness for short to power. O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.

P0139 HO2S2

CAUTION:
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is − 25%.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III

P0139 HO2S2
under the following condition. A
ECM
Con- Termi- Ground Condition Voltage EC
nector nal
50 Revving up to 4,000
above 0.68 V at least once C
during this procedure. D

E
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground F
ECM G
nector nal
The voltage should be H
50
F11 (HO2S2 Ground
signal) I

J
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III K
L
ECM
nector nal M
50
F11 (HO2S2 Ground N
signal)

Is the inspection result normal? O
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 P

CAUTION:

P0139 HO2S2
service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
E
• Intake air leaks F
• A/F sensor 1
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system too • Exhaust gas leaks
P0171 • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
lean
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
• Incorrect fuel pressure G
• Lack of fuel
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
I
J
>> GO TO 2.
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-27, "MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE K
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine? L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.RESTART ENGINE M
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE: N
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start? O
NO >> Check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II P
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.

NO >> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III

2. Start engine.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 MPH)

CAUTION:

EC
AABWA0309GB
P
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK


PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
Intake air leak detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-496, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.

NO >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.

Is the inspection result normal? EC
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
NO >> Repair or replace
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR C
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. D
3. For specification, refer to EC-502, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
With GST
1. Install all removed parts. E
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
Is the measurement value within the specification? F
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-142, "DTC Logic".
G
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. H
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. J
Clicking noise should be heard.

Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-423, "Component Function Check". L
PBIB3332E M
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. N
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. O
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
P

7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIA9666J

>> INSPECTION END

A

theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
E
• A/F sensor 1 F
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
Fuel injection system too
P0172 • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
• Mass air flow sensor G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I J
2. Start engine.
K
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. L
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. M
NOTE:
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much. N
Does engine start?
NO >> Check exhaust and intake air leak visually. O
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. P
NO >> GO TO 5.
2. Start engine.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 MPH)

CAUTION:

EC
AABWA0309GB
P


PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 2.
Is intake air leak detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. EC
NO >> Repair or replace
C
With CONSULT-III
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. For specification, refer to EC-502, "Mass Air Flow Sensor". D
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST. E
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 7. F
grounds. Refer to EC-142, "DTC Logic".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR G
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. H
Without CONSULT-III I
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
J
YES >> GO TO 8. K
EC-423, "Component Function Check".
L
PBIB3332E
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR M
1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".

Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. N
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors. O
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
>> INSPECTION END

P0181 FTT SENSOR
P0181 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance

[°C (°F)] [V] [kΩ]
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 SEF012P
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
Fuel tank temperature • Harness or connectors
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
P0181 sensor circuit range/per- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
from engine coolant temperature sensor and in-
formance • Fuel tank temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch and wait at least 10 seconds.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III
2. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication.
With GST
Is “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication less than 60°C (140°F)?
NO >> GO TO 4.
P0181 FTT SENSOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is less than 60°C (140°F). A
2. Wait at least 10 seconds.
With GST EC
YES >> Go to EC-236, "Diagnosis Procedure". C

P0181 FTT SENSOR
BBWA2636E

P0181 FTT SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump” harness connector and ground. C
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump

Ground Voltage D
Connector Terminal
B100 4 Ground Approx. 5 V
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

• Harness connectors B102, M13 G
• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and combination J
meter harness connector.
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump Combination meter K

Continuity
B100 5 M24 24 Existed
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
M
NO >> GO TO 5.
Check the following. N
• Harness connectors B102, M13
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
O
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
P
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.

P0181 FTT SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


3. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 kΩ
4 and 5 Temperature [°C (°F)]
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 kΩ
PBIB0931E

P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
A
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera- EC
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor C
decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
D
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
[°C (°F)] [V] [kΩ]
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 SEF012P E
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: F
G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC H
Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is I
sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Fuel tank temperature sensor
P0183
sensor circuit high input sent to ECM. J
1.PRECONDITIONING K
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
Is 1st trip DTC detected? N
O

BBWA2636E

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
pump” harness connector and ground. C
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump

Ground Voltage D
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

• Harness connectors B102, M13 G
H
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I
3. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and combination J
meter harness connector.
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump Combination meter K

Continuity
B100 5 M24 24 Existed
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
M
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
O
P
YES >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END


3. Remove fuel level sensor unit.

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 kΩ
4 and 5 Temperature [°C (°F)]
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 kΩ
PBIB0931E

A

PBIB0145E E
G
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
P0222
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223 (TP sensor 1) H
1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
TESTING CONDITION:
K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. L
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-244, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

BBWA2655E

YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
C
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- G
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM H

Continuity
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
I
YES >> GO TO 4. J
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- K
nector.

L
Continuity
F7 1 F11 33 Existed
M
YES >> GO TO 5. N
O
YES >> GO TO 7. P
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END


3. Perform EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
ground.
ECM
Connector Terminal
More than
33 Fully released
0.36V
(TP sensor
F11 Ground
34 Fully released
4.75V
(TP sensor
pressed 0.36V
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinders misfire. • Improper spark plug
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect fuel pressure J
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires.
• Intake air leak
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted K
• Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Signal plate
• A/F sensor 1
• Incorrect PCV hose connection L

1.PRECONDITIONING M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
P
NO >> GO TO 3.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Base fuel schedule Base fuel schedule in freeze frame data × (1 ± 0.1)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
YES >> Discover air leak location and repair.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
YES-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace it.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
1. Start engine and let engine idle.
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
EC-425, "Component Inspection".
C
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I D
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
E
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro- F
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. G
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. H
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal I
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion. J
Spark should be generated.

K
CAUTION:
• During the operation, always stay 0.5 m (19.7 in) away
from the spark plug and the ignition coil within. Be careful JMBIA0066GB
not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the L

electrical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE: M
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is mal-
functioning.
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II O
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and P
the grounded metal portion.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-432, "Component Function
Check".
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-112, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-112, "Spark
Plug".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-23, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
Check the following items. Refer to EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-502, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Follow the EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A/F sensor 1 ECM A

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed EC
2 53
and ground. C
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal D
1
2
E
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
49
53
G
YES >> GO TO 14. H
Refer to EC-133, "Component Inspection". I
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Replace A/F sensor 1. J

With CONSULT-III K
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
For specification, refer to EC-502, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
With GST L
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
For specification, refer to EC-502, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
Is the measurement value within the specification?
M
YES >> GO TO 16.
ground. Refer to EC-142, "DTC Logic".
N
16.CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-484, "Symptom Table".
YES >> GO TO 17.
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC P
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.

Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st
Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
>> GO TO 18.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE

>> INSPECTION END

P0327, P0328 KS
P0327, P0328 KS
A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A EC
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005398420 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition Possible cause
Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
input sent to ECM. E
Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
P0328
input sent to ECM.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at G
TESTING CONDITION:
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? J
K

P0327, P0328 KS
BBWA2637E

P0327, P0328 KS
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
EC
3. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor ECM

C
Continuity
F14 2 F11 40 Existed D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor ECM G

Continuity
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection". J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace knock sensor. K
Refer to EC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
>> INSPECTION END

M

N
2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminals as per the
following. O
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure
more than 10 MΩ. P
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys- JMBIA1630ZZ
ically damaged. Use only new ones.

P0327, P0328 KS
NO >> Replace knock sensor.

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing EC
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
PBIA9209J E
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
H
JMBIA0714GB

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

J
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) cir- K
cuit is open or shorted.]
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
is not detected by the ECM during the first
shorted.)
few seconds of engine cranking.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor cir- L
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
Crankshaft position sensor cuit is shorted.)
P0335 position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
(POS) circuit (EVAP control system pressure sensor
while the engine is running.
circuit is shorted.)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal M
is not in the normal pattern during engine run-
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
ning.
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Signal plate N

1.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION: P
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
BBWA3071E

A
2. Check ground connections E15, E24. Refer to EC-119, "Ground Inspection". EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. C
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connec-
tor and ground.
E
CKP sensor (POS)

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal F
YES >> GO TO 8. G
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3312E
3.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II H

3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector. I
CKP sensor (POS) ECM

Continuity J
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK CKP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
M
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal
74 Refrigerant pressure sensor E17 3 N
F11 75 CKP sensor (POS) F15 1
76 EVAP control system pressure sensor B104 3
E16 102 APP sensor E12 5
O

YES >> GO TO 5. P
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-451, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-308, "Component Inspection".)

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning components.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 10.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END
A
1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I EC

2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. C
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
F
PBIA9209J
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II G

Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (POS) termi-
nals as per the following.
H
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance [Ω at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ I
2 (+) - 3 (-)
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIA9584J
K

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIA9875J
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
JMBIA0714GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-352, "DTC Logic".
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
Camshaft position sensor • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
P0340 • Camshaft (INT)
(PHASE) circuit during engine running.
• Starter motor
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit
pattern during engine running.
• Dead (Weak) battery

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.

YES >> Go to EC-264, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
NO >> GO TO 3.
EC
1. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
C
D

BBWA2639E
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system (Refer to SC-16, "Trouble Diagnosis with Multitasking Battery Diagnostic A
Station".).
EC
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness con- E
nector and ground.
CMP sensor (PHASE)

Ground Voltage F
Connector Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM J

Continuity
3. Also check harness for short to power. K
YES >> GO TO 5.
L
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
2. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM N

Continuity
O
YES >> GO TO 6. P
YES >> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
PBIA9557J

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I

3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor.
YES >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9876J
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II

Check resistance camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminals as
per the following.
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance [Ω at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
A

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity C
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of A/F sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor D
2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (mani-
fold) malfunction is diagnosed.
E
SEF484YB
F
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube G
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not
Catalyst system efficiency operate properly.
P0420 • Fuel injector
below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not
• Fuel injector leaks
have enough oxygen storage capacity. H
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I

1.INSPECTION START
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
K
2.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
M
>> GO TO 3.
N
With CONSULT-III
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is more than 70°C (158°F). P
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.
10. Check the indication of “CATALYST”.

CMPLT >> GO TO 6.
INCMP >> GO TO 4.
1. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
will take approximately 5 minutes).
Does the indication change to “CMPLT”?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1. Stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F).
>> GO TO 3.
Check 1st trip DTC.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Terminal
nector
The voltage fluctuation cy-
50 Keeping engine speed cle takes more than 5 sec-
F11 (HO2S2 Ground at 2,500 rpm constant onds.
signal) under no load 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3
→ 0.6 - 1.0 PBIB2996E


A
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
C
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). D
PBIB1216E G
NO >> GO TO 3. H
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
I
NO >> GO TO 4.
J
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING
For procedure, refer to EC-24, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer toEC-502, "Idle Speed" and EC-502, "Ignition Timing". K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Follow the instruction of EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement". L
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. M
ground.
N
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
25 O
29
F10 Ground Battery voltage
30
31
P
JMBIA2201GB

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Perform EC-424, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:

NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
tion.

CAUTION:
• During the operation, always stay 0.5 m (19.7 in) away
from the spark plug and the ignition coil. Be careful not to JMBIA0066GB
get an electrical shock while checking, because the elec-

trical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
NOTE:
functioning.
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-434, "Diagnosis Procedure".
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-112, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9.
SEF156I

2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug A
and the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated. EC

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-112, "Spark C
Plug".
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. E
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector? F
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
H
YES >> Replace three way catalyst assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector
I

P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
PBIB1026E
• EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve stuck closed
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate properly, nection of rubber tube
EVAP control system in- EVAP control system has a leak between intake • Blocked rubber tube
P0441
correct purge flow manifold and EVAP control system pressure sen- • Cracked EVAP canister
sor. • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve circuit
• Blocked purge port
• EVAP canister vent control valve
• Drain filter

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.PRECONDITIONING

TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. A
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I EC
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III. D
Is COMPLETED displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 5. E
NO >> GO TO 4.
F
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
G
VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 mph)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm H
I
CAUTION:
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
J
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again. GO TO 3.
K
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen? L
6.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK M

NOTE:
N
Use component function check to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow
monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
O
P

Without CONSULT-III
1. Lift up drive wheels.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground
Connector Terminal
42
F11 Ground
(EVAP control system pressure sensor signal)
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute. PBIB3313E
Air conditioner switch ON

Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Selector lever Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1 V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6 for at least 1 second.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER

2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister.
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-68, "System
Description".
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL C/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL C/V Vacuum

100% Existed
0% Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.

vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-68, "System A
Description".
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
EC
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.

C
6. Revving engine up to 2,000rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.

D
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4. E
4.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. F
Refer to EC-68, "System Description".
YES >> GO TO 5. G
NO >> Repair it.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT H
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
I
K
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely. L

YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 7. M
NO >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U O
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
P
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
ies according to the valve opening.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.


YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to EC-309, "DTC Logic" for DTC P0452, EC-316, "DTC Logic" for DTC P0453.
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11.CHECK DRAIN FILTER
Refer to EC-277, "Component Inspection (Drain filter)".
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace drain filter.
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-498, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace it.
14.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 15.

>> INSPECTION END
A
Component Inspection (Drain filter) INFOID:0000000005398440
1.CHECK DRAIN FILTER EC

1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B. C
5. Block port B.
6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage.
Is the inspection result normal? D
E
F
PBIB3641E

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
• Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
• EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
• EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0442 small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
(negative pressure) erly.
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
• EVAP canister is saturated with water
• Fuel level sensor and the circuit
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
• ORVR system leaks
• Drain filter
CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may come on.

• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. A
1.PRECONDITIONING EC
TESTING CONDITION: C
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed
on flat level surface.
• Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
NOTE: D
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
Do you have CONSULT-III? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
With CONSULT-III
G
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) H
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III. I
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement". J
NG >> Go to EC-279, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
With GST L
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of DRIVING PATTERN in EC-471, "How to Set SRT Code" before driving
vehicle.
M
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to DRIVING PATTERN.
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. N
Is 1st trip DTC displayed?
YES-1 >> P0441: Go to EC-274, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
YES-2 >> P0442: Go to EC-279, "Diagnosis Procedure".
P
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN


2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. Then retighten
until ratcheting sound is heard.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-283, "Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Is there any leak in EVAP line?
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-500, "Exploded View".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Does water drain from the EVAP canister? A
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 12. EC
PBIB1213E
9.CHECK EVAP CANISTER D
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
E
The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb).
F
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection H
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION I
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine. J
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL C/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum. K

Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 13.
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION M
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. N
2. Stop engine.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. O

YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-68, "System Description".

YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
YES >> GO TO 15.
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
16.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-306, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 17.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
YES >> GO TO 18.
>> GO TO 19.
19.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-443, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 20.
NO >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
20.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between fuel filler tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace hose, tube or fuel filler tube.
21.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-446, "Component Inspection (Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve)".
YES >> GO TO 22.
NO >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
22.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-17, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 23.

EC
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap) INFOID:0000000005398443
C
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP
D
2. Remove fuel filler cap.
3. Wipe clean valve housing.
G
SEF445Y
H
4. Install fuel filler cap adapter (commercial service tool) to fuel
filler cap.
5. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
I
Pressure: 2
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22 -
2.90 psi)
Vacuum: J
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
SEF943S
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE FUEL FILLER CAP L
Replace fuel filler cap.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may M
illuminate.
>> INSPECTION END N
1.CHECK DRAIN FILTER O
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. P

4. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to EC

control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. C
JMBIA0069ZZ E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Possible cause G

DTC detecting condition
The canister purge flow is detected during
the vehicle is stopped while the engine is • EVAP control system pressure sensor
A running, even when EVAP canister purge • EVAP canister purge volume control so- H
volume control solenoid valve is complete- lenoid valve
EVAP canister purge ly closed. (The valve is stuck open.)
P0443 volume control solenoid • EVAP canister vent control valve
valve The canister purge flow is detected during • EVAP canister I
the specified driving conditions, even • Hoses
B
when EVAP canister purge volume control (Hoses are connected incorrectly or
solenoid valve is completely closed. clogged.)
J
1.PRECONDITIONING K
TESTING CONDITION: L
• Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and
vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
• Always perform test at a temperature of 5 to 60 °C (41 to 140°F).
• Cool the vehicle so that engine coolant temperature becomes same level as ambient temperature. M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4. N
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A
With CONSULT-III O
2. Check that the following condition are met.
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
3. Start engine and wait at least 60 seconds. P
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE B
With CONSULT-III
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A
With GST
2. Set voltmeter probes to ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM
Ground
Connector Terminal
43
F11 Ground
(Fuel tank temperature sensor signal)
3. Check that the voltage is 3.1 - 4.0 V.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? SEF113U

NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE B
With GST
Is 1st trip DTC displayed?

EC
ABBWA0351GB
P
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.

4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve harness connector and ground.
EVAP canister purge volume

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. PBIB0080E

• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.

ECM
control solenoid valve Continuity
F22 2 F10 9 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

YES >> GO TO 5.
With CONSULT-III

2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine. A
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
D
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING E
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE G
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATURATED WITH WATER I
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from EVAP canister. J
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 13. K
PBIB1213E M
N
attached.
O
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 12.
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection

>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL C/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Existed
0% Not existed
PBIA9668J
Without CONSULT-III
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity

Condition
between (A) and (B)
12 V direct current supply between
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve

P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
A
VALVE
EC
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to
control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF C
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
D
E
JMBIA0069ZZ

F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

G
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 control solenoid valve circuit
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
shorted.) H
to ECM through the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
• Harness or connectors I
An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 control solenoid valve circuit
to ECM through the valve • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
shorted
lenoid valve
J
1.CONDITIONING
K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. L
>> GO TO 2.
M
2. Check 1st trip DTC. N
NO >> INSPECTION END O

VALVE
BBWA3000E

VALVE
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve harness connector and ground. A

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage EC
Connector Terminal
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. SEF206W
D
• IPDM E/R harness connector E43 E
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
F
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT G
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. H
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
I
ECM
control solenoid valve Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
F22 2 F10 9 Existed
K
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-III M
2. Start engine.
N
YES >> GO TO 6. O
NO >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". P
YES >> GO TO 6.

VALVE
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL C/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Existed
0% Not existed
PBIA9668J
Without CONSULT-III
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
between (A) and (B)
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve

P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
A
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis- EC
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal C
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains D
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
Control System” diagnosis.
PBIB1263E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
EVAP canister vent control An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
P0447 (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.
• EVAP canister vent control valve H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
TESTING CONDITION: J
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2. K
2. Check 1st trip DTC. L
NO >> INSPECTION END M

AABWA0310GB
1.INSPECTION START

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. A
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve. C
Clicking sound should be heard.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. F
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve
harness connector and ground.
G
EVAP canister vent control valve
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
B105 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 5. I
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0080E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J

• Harness connectors E7, M69 K
• Harness connectors M12, B101
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
L
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector. N
EVAP canister vent control valve ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
B105 2 E16 28 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Junction block connector F8, E8

• Harness connectors E7, M69
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
YES >> GO TO 8.
YES >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
3. Check portion (A) of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
Is it rusted?
YES >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
NO >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA0168ZZ
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-III
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
VENT CONT/V condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
ON Not existed
OFF Existed
Operation takes less than 1 second.
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions. JMBIA0169ZZ

Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B) A

Not existed
terminals (1) and (2)
OFF Existed EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III D
With CONSULT-III
1. Clean the air passage [portion (A) to (B)] of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. E
F
ON Not existed
OFF Existed G
Without CONSULT-III
1. Clean the air passage [portion (A) to (B)] of EVAP canister vent H
control valve using an air blower. JMBIA0169ZZ
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions. I
Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B) J

Not existed
OFF Existed K
L

The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System” diagnosis.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
EVAP canister vent control EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
P0448
valve close closed under specified driving conditions. • Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures three times.
- Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 min-
utes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
- Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.
6. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
- Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.

- Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
A
EC
PBIB0972E
7. Check 1st trip DTC. D

With GST
Is 1st trip DTC detected? E
F

AABWA0310GB
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE


YES >> GO TO 2. A
NO >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor D
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Does water drain from EVAP canister? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
F
PBIB1213E
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER H
attached.
I
YES >> GO TO 6. J
NO >> GO TO 5.
Check the following. K
L
M
Water should not exist. N

YES >> GO TO 7. O
YES >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

3. Check portion (A) of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
Is it rusted?
YES >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
NO >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA0168ZZ
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-III
ON Not existed
OFF Existed
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions. JMBIA0169ZZ
Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)

Not existed
OFF Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
With CONSULT-III
1. Clean the air passage [portion (A) to (B)] of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. A
ON Not existed EC
OFF Existed
C
Without CONSULT-III
1. Clean the air passage [portion (A) to (B)] of EVAP canister vent
control valve using an air blower. JMBIA0169ZZ
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the D
following conditions.
E
Condition Air passage continuity between (A) and (B)
Not existed
terminals (1) and (2) F
OFF Existed
G
H

P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the

purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pres-
sure increases.
PBIB3370E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
(EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
is shorted.]
EVAP control system (Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
P0451 pressure sensor perfor- is shorted.)
control system pressure sensor
mance (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
NOTE:


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
EC
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness connector.
D
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check the voltage between EVAP control system pressure sen- E
sor harness connector and ground.
EVAP control system pressure sensor F

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
G
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E H
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. I
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal J
74 Refrigerant pressure sensor E17 3
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS M
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-261, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-451, "Diagnosis Procedure".) N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component. O
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 7.
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly

>> INSPECTION END

YES >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
harness connector and ground under the following conditions.
ECM Condition
[Applied vacuum kPa Voltage
Connector Terminal (kg/cm2, psi)
42 Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 V

F11 (EVAP control system 2.1 to 2.5 V lower
pressure sensor signal) -26.7 (-0.272, -3.87)
than above value
CAUTION: PBIB3314E
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.

• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-0.952 kg/cm2, -13.53 psi) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (1.033 kg/
cm2, 14.69 psi).
NO >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor

A
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the EC

sure increases.
C
PBIB3370E E
G
circuit is open or shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit H
is shorted.)
(Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
EVAP control system An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0452 is shorted.)
pressure sensor low input sent to ECM. I
shorted.)
J
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K

1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
M
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N
With CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” indication is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. P
With GST

2. Set voltmeter probes to ECM harness connector and ground as
per the following.
ECM
Ground
Connector Terminal
43
F11 Ground
3. Make sure that the voltage is less than 4.2 V.
5. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. SEF113U


EC
AABWA0311GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check the voltage between EVAP control system pressure sen-
EVAP control system pressure sensor

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E
4.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check the continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
EVAP control system pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
B104 3 F11 76 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
6.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

ECM Sensor A
EC
E16 102 APP sensor E12 5 C
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
7.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. E
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR G
H
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY I
J
>> INSPECTION END
10.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT K
3. Check the continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector and ECM har- L
ness connector.
EVAP control system pressure sensor ECM M

Continuity
N
YES >> GO TO 12. O
NO >> GO TO 11.
P

12.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
ness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 13.
YES >> GO TO 15.
>> INSPECTION END


ECM Condition

than above value
CAUTION: PBIB3314E

cm2, 14.69 psi).

NO >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor A
EC

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the

sure increases.
PBIB3370E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
is shorted.]
(Accelerator pedal circuit is shorted.)
EVAP control system pres- An excessively high voltage from the sensor shorted.)
P0453
sure sensor high input is sent to ECM. • EVAP control system pressure sensor
• EVAP canister
• Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” indication is more than 0°C (32°F).
With GST

2. Set voltmeter probes to ECM harness connector and ground as
per the following. A
ECM
Ground
Connector Terminal EC
43
F11 Ground
C
3. Make sure that the voltage is less than 4.2 V.
5. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. SEF113U
6. Check 1st trip DTC. D

NO >> INSPECTION END E

AABWA0311GB

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
EC

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check the voltage between EVAP control system pressure sen- E
EVAP control system pressure sensor F

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
G
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E H
ness connector.
J
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 6. L
NO >> GO TO 5.
M
• Harness connectors E8, F8 N
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. P

ECM Sensor
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
ness connector.

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.

12.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
ness connector.
EC

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
D
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 13.
E
• Harness connectors B102, M13 F
G
14.CHECK RUBBER TUBE H
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J

YES >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L
M
YES >> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATURATED WITH WATER N
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. O
Does water drain from EVAP canister?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> GO TO 20. P
PBIB1213E


attached.
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END


ECM Condition

than above value
CAUTION: PBIB3314E

cm2, 14.69 psi).
NO >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor

A

This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
C
PBIB1026E
H
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to I
close.
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. J
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister K
vent control valve.
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) L
EVAP control system has a very large leak such
EVAP control system leaks
P0455 as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system
gross leak detected • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
does not operate properly.
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the M
circuit
lenoid valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor N
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve O
• Drain filter
CAUTION: P
MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
1.PRECONDITIONING
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC
Check DTC.
P0455 >> Go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure".
P0442 >> Go to EC-279, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of DIRVING PATTERN in EC-471, "How to Set SRT Code" before driving
vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to DRIVING PATTERN.
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. EC
SEF915U D
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
F
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. G
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. H
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap)". I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. J
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection. K
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE M
>> GO TO 7. N
O
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace drain filter. P

YES >> GO TO 9.
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL C/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum.

YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 12.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 12.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14.
YES >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

YES >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR C
D
YES >> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE E
YES >> GO TO 18.
18.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE G
H
YES >> GO TO 19.
I
YES >> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

L
>> INSPECTION END
M
N
SEF445Y

filler cap.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 -

2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
SEF943S
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE FUEL FILLER CAP
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
illuminate.
>> INSPECTION END


5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

A

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis. C
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
D
PBIB1026E I
J
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. K
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
trol valve. L
Evaporative emission • Loose or disconnected rubber tube M
• EVAP system has a very small leak.
control system very • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
P0456 • EVAP system does not operate prop-
small leak (negative • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
erly.
pressure check) valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor N
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
O
• Fuel level sensor and the circuit P
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
• Drain filter
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.PRECONDITIONING
NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE, leave the
vehicle for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed.
- Fuel is refilled or drained.
- EVAP component parts is/are removed.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4 V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1.
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-20, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this

A
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK EC

With GST
CAUTION:
• Do not use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
C
• Do not start engine.
• Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose. D
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08. E
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied. F
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (0.028 kg/cm2, 0.39 psi)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and SEF462UI
G
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa
(0.004 kg/cm2, 0.06 psi).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.RELEASE PRESSURE I
1. Disconnect GST.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
4. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
5. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
YES >> GO TO 2. O
NO >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U


YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection (Fuel filler cap)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 8.
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Does water drain from EVAP canister?
YES >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1213E

attached.

YES-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 11. A
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART EC
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection C

D
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. E
2. Start engine.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
F

G
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> GO TO 13. H
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
2. Stop engine.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. J

K
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13. L
M
YES >> GO TO 14.
N
YES >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

YES >> GO TO 16.
YES >> GO TO 17.
YES >> GO TO 18.
>> GO TO 19.
YES >> GO TO 20.
YES >> GO TO 21.
YES >> GO TO 22.
YES >> GO TO 23.
>> INSPECTION END



A
EC
SEF445Y
D
filler cap.
5. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. E
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 -

2.90 psi) F
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm , 2
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
G
SEF943S
NO >> GO TO 2.
H
2.REPLACE FUEL FILLER CAP
CAUTION: I
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
illuminate.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet. L
5. Block port B. M
YES >> INSPECTION END N
PBIB3641E
P

P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit.
The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combina-
tion meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output volt-
age changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-351, "DTC Logic".
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
(The CAN communication line is open or
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal be- shorted)
Fuel level sensor circuit
P0460 ing varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to • Harness or connectors
noise
ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION

Refer to DI-14, "Trouble Diagnosis".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DI-14, "Trouble Diagnosis"
>> INSPECTION END

A
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. EC
age changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has F
been driven.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
(The CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
shorted) H
Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even
range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
tance.
• Fuel level sensor I
J
Use component function check to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this K
YES >> INSPECTION END L
M
1.PRECONDITIONING
WARNING: N
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to GI-3, "Gen-
eral Precaution".
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting component function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. P

With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.

2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-496, "Inspection".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03 V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-496, "Inspection".
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.

YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. EC
age changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
E
UXXXX.
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. F
Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors G
P0462
low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is H
P0463 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
high input sent to ECM. • Combination meter
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11 V and 16 V at K
ignition switch ON.
>> GO TO 2. L
M
O
YES >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
A
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control EC
unit)” via the CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM via the CAN
communication line.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005398499 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
E
• Harness or connectors F
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
The vehicle speed signal sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor is almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) even when (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)
vehicle is being driven. • Wheel sensor G
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5. J
2.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a M
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. N
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 mph) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE P
2. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
CAUTION:

P0500 VSS
A/T: 1,900 - 6,000 rpm

ENG SPEED
M/T: 2,500 - 6,000 rpm
A/T: 4.8 - 31.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
M/T: 3.8 - 31.8 msec
Except P or N position (A/T)
Selector lever
Except Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Use component function check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this

With GST
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-20, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-13, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
>> INSPECTION END

P0506 ISC SYSTEM
P0506 ISC SYSTEM
A
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let EC
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value C
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan D
operation, etc.).
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. F
Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle • Electric throttle control actuator G
P0506
RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more. • Intake air leak

1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING :
Special Repair Requirement", before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure.
TESTING CONDITION: J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).
K
>> GO TO 2.
L
3. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
4. Check 1st trip DTC. M
NO >> INSPECTION END N
1.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK O

P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.

P0506 ISC SYSTEM
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
P0507 ISC SYSTEM
A
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let EC
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value C
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan D
operation, etc.).
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. F
• Electric throttle control actuator G
Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle
P0507 • Intake air leak
RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.
• PCV system
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING :
Special Repair Requirement", before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. J
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L
3. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. M
O
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
P
YES >> GO TO 2.

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
A
ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio EC
feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned ON.
C
PBIA9222J E
G
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
P0603 Engine control module • ECM
properly.

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
>> GO TO 2. J
1. Turn ignition switch ON wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 minutes. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Check 1st trip DTC. L
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N

2. Erase DTC. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Refer to EC-347, "DTC Logic". O
Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
P
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".

>> INSPECTION END

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal EC

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J E
G
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A K
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B M
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
NO >> GO TO 4. O
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. P
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.

P0605 ECM
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase 1st trip DTC. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Refer to EC-349, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
A
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis
P0607 CAN communication bus • ECM
of CAN controller of ECM.
F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? H
I
1.INSPECTION START
J
2. Erase DTC. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Refer to EC-351, "DTC Logic".
4. Check DTC. K
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END L
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. M
ment".
N
>> INSPECTION END

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source [Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
P0643
circuit short for sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.]
• Throttle position sensor
• Battery current sensor
• Power steering pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
BBWA2649E
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and
ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E12 4 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

ECM Sensor
72 Electric throttle control actuator F7 2
F11
78 CMP sensor (PHASE) F21 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-266, "Component Inspection".)
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.

8.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
>> INSPECTION END D

P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
When the shift lever position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. (M/T)
When the shift lever position is P or N, transmission range switch is ON. (A/T)
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Park/neutral position switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T) (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T)
P0850
switch is not changed in the process of engine starting circuit is open or shorted.]
and driving. • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T)
• Transmission range switch (A/T)

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH (M/T) OR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T) FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions.
Selector lever position Known-good signal

N or P position (A/T)
ON
Except above position OFF
YES >> GO TO 4.
CAUTION:

P0850 PNP SWITCH
A/T: 1,650 - 6,375 rpm A

ENG SPEED
M/T: 1,930 - 6,375 rpm
A/T: 3.5 - 31.8 msec EC
B/FUEL SCHDL
M/T: 2.5 - 31.8 msec
C
Is 1st trip DTC detected? D
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK E
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T) or transmis- F
sion range switch (A/T) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
H
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
under the following conditions.
J
ECM
Connector Terminal
P or N (A/T)
Approx. 0 V K
69 Neutral (M/T)
Selector
F11 (PNP sig- Ground
lever Except
nal) Battery voltage
above L
Is the inspection result normal? SEC910C

NO >> Go to EC-358, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

P0850 PNP SWITCH
ABBWA0352GB
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH (M/T) OR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T) harness connec-
tor.

P0850 PNP SWITCH
4. Check the voltage between PNP switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T) harness connector and A
ground.
A/T M/T
EC
E
PBIB3002E PBIB3003E
PNP switch (M/T)

F
Transmission range switch (A/T) Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
G
F25 (A/T) 1
Ground Battery voltage
F24 (M/T) 2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• IPDM E/R harness connector E43 (M/T) J
• IPDM E/R harness connector E45 (A/T)
• 10 A fuse (No. 51) (M/T)
• 10 A fuse (No. 54) (A/T) K
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T) and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
3.CHECK PNP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check the continuity between PNP switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T) harness connector
and ECM harness connector.
N
PNP switch (M/T)
Transmission range ECM
switch (A/T) Continuity
O
F25 (A/T) 2
F11 69 Existed P
F24 (M/T) 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PNP SWITCH (M/T) OR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T)
P0850 PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-94, "Component Inspection" (A/T) or MT-13, "Checking" (M/T).
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace PNP switch (M/T) or transmission range switch (A/T).
>> INSPECTION END

P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
A

NOTE:
DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for A/F sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. C
The closed loop control function for bank 1 does D
not operate even when vehicle is driving in the • Harness or connectors
specified condition. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P1148 Closed loop control function shorted.)
The closed loop control function for bank 2 does • A/F sensor 1 E
not operate even when vehicle is driving in the • A/F sensor 1 heater
specified condition.

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay-1)
heat).
• Cooling fan relays-2 and -3
• Cooling fan system does not operate properly
• Cooling fan motor
Engine over temperature (Overheat).
P1217 • Radiator hose
(Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system
• Radiator
using the proper filling method.
• Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Reservoir tank
range.
• Water pump
• Thermostat
• Water control valve
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-12, "Changing Engine
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining" and LU-8, "Refilling".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-15, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.

WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. A
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
YES >> Go to EC-363, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEF621W
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II D
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.

Did customer fill the coolant? E
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III F
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. G
3. Make sure that cooling fan motor operates at each speed (LOW/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". H
NO >> Go to EC-363, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION J
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. K
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that cooling fan motor operates at each speed (LOW/HI).
Without CONSULT-III L
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active
Test".
2. Make sure that cooling fan motor operates at each speed (Low/High).
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
N
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-I
Check cooling system for leak. Refer to CO-12, "Inspection".
Is leakage detected? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-II P
Check the following for leak.

• Hose (Refer to CO-12, "Inspection".)
• Radiator (Refer to CO-15, "Checking Radiator".)
• Water pump (Refer to CO-22, "Inspection".)

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-15, "Checking Radiator Cap".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace radiator cap.
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace thermostat.
6.CHECK WATER CONTROL VALVE
Check water control valve. Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace water control valve
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, check the following.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester MA-15, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-12, "Inspection"
reservoir tank and radiator
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester CO-15, "Checking Radiator Cap"
ON* 2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-12, "Inspection"
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-24, "Inspection"
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan motor • CONSULT-III Operating EC-415, "Component

Function Check"
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-12, "Inspection"
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-26, "Inspection"
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-76, "Disassembly and
gauge mum distortion (warping) Assembly"
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-97, "Inspection"
tons walls or piston

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. A
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-8, "Troubleshooting Chart". EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to
PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is excessively • Electric throttle control actuator
P1225
learning performance low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct.

P1225 TP SENSOR
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing. A
- Electric throttle control actuator (2)
YES >> GO TO 2. EC
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
C
JMBIA0447ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J

P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR

kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to
PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not performed • Electric throttle control actuator
P1226
learning performance successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 32 times.


P1226 TP SENSOR
and the housing. A
YES >> GO TO 2. EC
C
JMBIA0447ZZ

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J

P1421 COLD START CONTROL
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with pre-warming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine • Lack of intake air volume
Cold start emission reduction
P1421 idle speed properly when engine is started with • Fuel injection system
strategy monitoring
pre-warming up condition. • ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 5°C (41°F) and 36°C (97°F) (A/T) or 15°C
(59°F) and 36°C (97°F) (M/T).
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1.
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
• Crushed intake air passage

• Intake air passage clogging
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION EC
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-223, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Go to EC-225, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0171.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D
2. Erase 1st trip DTC. Refer to “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC” in EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. Refer to EC-370, "DTC Logic". E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END F
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. G
ment".
H
>> INSPECTION END

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for
engine control.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,XXXX.
Input speed sensor signal is different from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
Input speed sensor the theoretical value calculated by ECM ed)
P1715
(TCM output) from secondary speed sensor signal and • Harness or connectors
engine rpm signal. (Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• TCM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
CAUTION:
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM.
>> INSPECTION END

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
P1805 Brake switch for extremely long time while the vehicle is (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
driving. • Stop lamp switch E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC. G
YES >> Go to EC-374, "Diagnosis Procedure". H

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
AABWA0316GB
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake pedal Stop lamp A

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
EC
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. C
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
G
PBIB2284E
Stop lamp switch H

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3. J
• Harness connectors E7, M69 K
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
L
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector.
N
ECM Stop lamp switch
Continuity
E16 99 E13 2 Existed O
P
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-376, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 6.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000005398547
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
Terminals Condition Continuity

Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
PBIB2285E
Terminals Condition Continuity

Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
A
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle EC
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2100
relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
F
• Throttle control motor relay
Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2103 G
relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected? J
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100 K

3. Check DTC. L
Is DTC detected?
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. N
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-378, "Diagnosis Procedure". O

AABWA0313GB
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


ground. A
ECM
Ground Voltage
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9569J
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
E
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity F
F10 15 E46 46 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3. H

Check the following. I
J
4.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 52) from IPDM E/R. K
2. Check 15 A fuse for blown.
L
YES >> GO TO 8.
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I M
N
ECM
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: OFF Approximately 0 V O
F10 2 Ground
Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 8. PBIA9568J
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F10 2 E43 8 Existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM. ECM controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to driving condition via the throttle
control motor. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
F
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not G
P2101 (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
performance operate properly.
• Electric throttle control actuator

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running. J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K

3. Check DTC. L
Is DTC detected?

AABWA0312GB

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
EC
ECM
Ground Condition Voltage C
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: OFF Approx. 0 V
F10 2 Ground
Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage D
YES >> GO TO 9. PBIA9568J
NO >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
G
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
E46 46 F10 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.

• Harness connectors E8, F8 K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
M
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
N
E43 8 F10 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.


7.CHECK FUSE
YES >> GO TO 8.
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
4. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.

Continuity
1 Not existed
5
4 Existed
F7 F10
1 Existed
6
4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
and the housing.
YES >> GO TO 11.
JMBIA0447ZZ
11.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 13.
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
1. Replace malfunction electric throttle control actuator.

EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005398556 C

D
3. Check the resistance between electric throttle control actuator
terminals as per the following. E
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] F

NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2909E
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H

2. Perform EC-385, "Special Repair Requirement". I
>> INSPECTION END

J

K
>> GO TO 2. L
M
>> END
N

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
back to the ECM. ECM controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to driving conditions via the throt-
tle control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
P2118
circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
AABWA0314GB
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.

Continuity
1 Not existed
5
4 Existed
F7 F10
1 Existed
6
4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check the resistance between electric throttle control actuator
terminals as per the following.
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2909E

2. Perform EC-389, "Special Repair Requirement". A
>> INSPECTION END

EC
1.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING C

>> GO TO 2. D
Refer to EC-26, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" E
>> END
F

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve and controls the throttle valve opening angle in
response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
Electric throttle control
P2119 Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
actuator B
not in specified range.
C ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Set selector lever to P (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
9. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

and the housing. A
YES >> GO TO 2. EC
C
JMBIA0447ZZ

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
PBIB1741E
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Refer to EC-352, "DTC Logic".
Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
P2122
sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2123 (APP sensor 1)
sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
BBWA2652E
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. PBIA9606J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
E12 2 E16 111 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

A
>> INSPECTION END
EC
1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. C
ground.
D
ECM
Connector Terminal E
110 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V
(APP sensor
1 signal) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V
Accelerator F
E16 Ground
103 pedal Fully released 0.3 - 0.6 V
(APP sensor PBIA9572J
G
NO >> GO TO 2.
H
2. Perform EC-395, "Special Repair Requirement". I
>> INSPECTION END

J
1.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING K

Refer to EC-25, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 2. L
Refer to EC-25, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". M
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING N
O
>> END


are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
P2127
sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
is shorted.]
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP circuit is shorted.)
P2128
sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

EC
BBWA3074E
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 10.
APP sensor ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 7. C
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
APP sensor ECM

Continuity E
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-399, "Component Inspection". H
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9. I
2. Perform EC-400, "Special Repair Requirement". J
>> INSPECTION END

K
L
>> INSPECTION END
M

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. N
ground.
O
ECM
Connector Terminal P
(APP sensor
Accelerator
E16 Ground

NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
EC-352, "DTC Logic". G
• Harness or connector H
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
(TP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P2135 circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
mance and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 or 2)
I
1.PRECONDITIONING J
>> GO TO 2. L
2. Check DTC. M
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END N

P2135 TP SENSOR
BBWA2657E

P2135 TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
C
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground. G

Continuity H
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
K

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
1 33
F7 F11 Existed
3 34
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
YES >> GO TO 5.
N
Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6. P
>> INSPECTION END

P2135 TP SENSOR

>> INSPECTION END


ground.
ECM
Connector Terminal
More than
33 Fully released
0.36V
(TP sensor
F11 Ground
34 Fully released
4.75V
(TP sensor
pressed 0.36V
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal C
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on D
these signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
• Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit I
is shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
shorted.)
P2138 sensor circuit range/per- compared with the signals from APP sensor
(EVAP control system sensor circuit is J
formance 1 and APP sensor 2.
shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 or 2)
K
L
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE O

2. Check DTC.
P
Is DTC detected?

P2138 APP SENSOR
BBWA3075E

P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
EC
ground.
C
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in
harness or connectors. PBIA9606J
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I F

ground.
G
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9607J
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II J

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. K
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
M
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N
ECM Sensor O
P
YES >> GO TO 6.

P2138 APP SENSOR
6.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 11.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as per the fol-
lowing.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
2 111
E12 E16 Existed
1 104
YES >> GO TO 8.
1. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as per the fol-
lowing.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
3 110
E12 E16 Existed
6 103
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

P2138 APP SENSOR
A
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
ground.
C
ECM
Connector Terminal
D
(APP sensor
Accelerator
E16 Ground E

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY G

H
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005398591 I

J
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING M
>> END N

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
JMBIA0112GB
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
• The output voltage computed by ECM from the
• A/F sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for
• A/F sensor 1 heater
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 a specified period.
P2A00 • Fuel pressure
circuit range/performance • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a
specified period.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
5. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
Is 1st trip DTC detected? A
EC
AABWA0307GB

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
2. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
1. Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
>> GO TO 4.
1. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0172. Refer to EC-223, "DTC Logic" or EC-229,
"DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3308E


P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
• IPDM E/R harness connector E45 A
• 10 A fuse (No. 54)
EC
C
D
A/F sensor 1 ECM
Continuity
E
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector F
and ground.
A/F sensor 1 G
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
F12 Ground Not existed H
2
ECM I
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
F11 Ground Not existed J
53
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER L
M
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
YES >> GO TO 11. O
11.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 P
CAUTION:
[commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved Anti-seize Lubricant (commercial
service tool).

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 13.
12.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Is “0.000” displayed?
NO >> GO TO 13.
Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-27, "MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
YES >> GO TO 14.
With CONSULT-III
>> INSPECTION END

COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
A
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant EC
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
COOLING FAN MOTOR
Models without A/C C
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as per the following.
D
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan Speed
(+) (–)
1 3 and 4 E
2 3 and 4
Low (LOW)
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4 F
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
Models with A/C G

The cooling fan operates at high (HI) speed when the current flows, and operates at low (LOW) speed when
cooling fan motor and the resistor are circuited in series.
H
1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION

I
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
J
3. Touch “LOW” and “Hi” on the CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active K
Test".
2. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.
NO >> Refer to EC-417, "Diagnosis Procedure".
M

COOLING FAN
BBWA2997E

COOLING FAN
EC
BBWA3001E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005398599 P
1.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


COOLING FAN
3. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and
ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2067E

• 50 A fusible link (letter J)
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E46 and E48.
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E46 39
Ground Existed
E48 59
OK or NG
OK (Models with A/C)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Models without A/C)>>GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
20
E44 E3 1 Existed
24
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E3 2 Ground Existed
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 5.

COOLING FAN
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground A
• Resistor E5
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC
C
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity D
20 1
E44 23 E3 3 Existed E
24 2
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
F
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal G
E3 4 Ground Existed
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
I
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R J
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
O
COOLING FAN MOTOR P

Model with A/C

COOLING FAN
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (-)
Cooling fan motor 1 2
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
SEF888V
Models without A/C

check operation.
terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
1 4
Low
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W


ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred via EC
the CAN communication line.
C
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication E

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-421, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
H
Monitor item Condition Indication
ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch I
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
K
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication L

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
Is the inspection result normal? M
N
1.INSPECTION START O
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-421, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident? P
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2.
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-55, "Work Flow".

>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-13, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis" (For USA) or LT-36, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis"
(For Canada).
>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to MTC-23, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair".
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
A
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM EC
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura- C
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs. D
PBIA9664J E
1.INSPECTION START F
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION H
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. J

K
NO >> Go to EC-424, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
PBIB3332E

FUEL INJECTOR
BBWA3003E
1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.

FUEL INJECTOR
4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and
ground. A
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal EC
1 F17 1
2 F18 1
Ground Battery voltage C
3 F19 1
4 F20 1 JMBIA1636ZZ

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

F
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
G
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
Fuel injector ECM
Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 F17 2 31
J
2 F18 2 30
F10 Existed
3 F19 2 29
K
4 F20 2 25
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR M

Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
P


FUEL INJECTOR
3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.
JMBIA1637ZZ

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓ C
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine D
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
E
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation F

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
G
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
H
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION I

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
J
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
NO >> EC-428, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
ALBIA0276ZZ

FUEL PUMP
AABWA0317GB
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


FUEL PUMP
ground. A
ECM
Ground Voltage
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9573J
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

2. Disconnect IDPDM E/R harness connector E46.
E
4. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and
ground.
F
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> GO TO 10.
PBIB3319E

• Harness or connectors E8, F8.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R J
4.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III K
3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. L
pump” harness connector and ground. M
Fuel level sensor unit

and fuel pump Ground Voltage N
Connector Terminal
Battery voltage should exist 1 second
B100 1 Ground
after ignition switch is turn ON. O
NO >> GO TO 5. P
5.CHECK FUSE
3. Check 15 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 6.
FUEL PUMP
NO >> Replace15 A fuse.
6.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
harness connector.
Fuel level sensor unit and

IPDM E/R
fuel pump Continuity
E45 36 B100 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”

8.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
Fuel level sensor unit

and fuel pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B100 3 Ground Existed
2. Also heck harness for short to power.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK FUEL PUMP
YES >> GO TO 10.

1.CHECK FUEL PUMP


FUEL PUMP
terminals as per the following. A
1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] EC
C
SEC918C

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Does the engine start?
2.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
3.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM harness connector and
ground.
ECM
Ground Voltage signal
Connector Terminal
17
18
21
F10 Ground
PBIA9567J
22
PBIA9265J
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

IGNITION SIGNAL
EC
BBWA2658E
P

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA2659E
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


IGNITION SIGNAL
ground. A
ECM
Ground Voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9575J
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

2. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector.
E
4. Check the voltage between condenser-2 harness connector and
ground.
F
Condenser-2
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
G
YES >> GO TO 5. H
NO >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0624E
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III I

3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser-2 harness connector. J
IPDM E/R Condenser-2

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K
E43 3 F26 1 Existed
L
NO >> GO TO 4.
M
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-2
O
5.CHECK CONDENSER-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
2. Check the continuity between condenser-2 harness connector and ground.
Condenser-2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F26 2 Ground Existed

IGNITION SIGNAL
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-438, "Component Inspection (Condenser-2)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace condenser.
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and
ground.
Ignition coil
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal
1 F34 3
2 F35 3
Ground Battery voltage
3 F36 3
4 F37 3 PBIB0138E

YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil
Ground Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal
1 F34 2
2 F35 2
Ground Existed
3 F36 2
4 F37 2
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ignition coil harness connector.

IGNITION SIGNAL
Ignition coil ECM A

Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 F34 1 17
EC
2 F35 1 18
F14 Existed
3 F36 1 22
4 F37 1 21 C
D
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR E
Refer to EC-437, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
YES >> GO TO 11. F
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
G
>> INSPECTION END H

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000005398618
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I I

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as per the fol- J
lowing.
Terminals Resistance [Ω at 25°C (77°F)] K

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0 L
2 and 3
M
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transis-
tor.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II N
CAUTION:
NOTE: P
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
4. Start engine.
IGNITION SIGNAL
12. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.

CAUTION:
• During the operation, always stay 0.5 cm (19.7 in) away
from the spark plug and the ignition coil. Be careful not to JMBIA0066GB
get an electrical shock while checking, because the elec-

trical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
NOTE:
functioning.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
Component Inspection (Condenser-2) INFOID:0000000005398619
1.CHECK CONDENSER-2
3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> Replace condenser-2.
PBIB0794E

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
A
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination EC

meter.
The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains C
on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system
malfunction.
For details, refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description". D
SEF217U E
1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION F

2. Make sure that MIL lights up.
G
H

ABBWA0353GB

EC
BBWA2998E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005398623 P
1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.

2.CHECK DTC WITH METER

Refer to DI-13, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> Replace combination meter.

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
A
EC
JMBIA1930GB
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut G
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged H
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: I
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. J
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to FL-5, "Checking Fuel Line". K
- Disconnect battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. L
• Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. M
N
1.CHECK ORVR FUNCTION
Check whether the following symptoms are present.
• Fuel odor from EVAP canister is strong. O
• Cannot refuel/Fuel odor from the fuel filler opening is strong while refueling.
Is any symptom present?
YES >> Go to EC-443, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
1.INSPECTION START
Check whether the following symptoms are present.
A: Fuel odor from EVAP canister is strong.

B: Cannot refuel/Fuel odor from the fuel filler opening is strong while refueling.
Which symptom is present?
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 8.
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check if water will drain from EVAP canister.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1213E
4.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 5.
OK >> GO TO 6.
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

attached.
attached.

YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 10. A
Check if water will drain from EVAP canister.
EC
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 13.
C
PBIB1213E
E
F
>> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK DRAIN FILTER G
OK >> GO TO 12. H
I
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose. J

13.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and
improper connection. K
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. L

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. M
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Replace fuel filler tube. N
O
YES >> GO TO 16.
P
16.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check fuel filler tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Replace fuel filler tube.

17.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I

Check one-way valve for clogging.
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
18.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as per the following.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
NO >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
Component Inspection (Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve) INFOID:0000000005398627
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain fuel from the tank as per the following:
- Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
- Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
- Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as per the following.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as per the following.
- Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
- Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
- Put fuel tank upside down.
- Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−0.136 kg/cm3, −1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

EC
H
BBIA0694E
1. Filler tube 2. Recirculation line 3. EVAP/ORVR line

4. Vacuum/pressure handy pump 5. Fuel tank I

YES >> INSPECTION END J
Without CONSULT-III K
2. Drain fuel from the tank as per the following:
- Remove fuel gauge retainer. L
- Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as per the following.
the air flows freely into the tank. M
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as per the following.
- Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
- Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. N
- Put fuel tank upside down.
- Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−0.136 kg/cm3, −1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer O

BBIA0694E

4. Vacuum/pressure handy pump 5. Fuel tank


5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
A
EC
G
PBIB2962E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. H
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by I
and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crank-
case. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air
inlet tubes to rocker cover. J
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction. K
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
PBIB1588E
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.
L
1.CHECK PCV VALVE M

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is N
placed over valve inlet.
NO >> Replace PCV valve.
P
PBIB1589E

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2657E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
ground.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
41
F11 Ground 1.0 - 4.0V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal)
NO >> Go to EC-451, "Diagnosis Procedure". PBIA9574J

EC
BBWA2662E
P

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness
connector and ground.
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y

• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and refrigerant pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8. A
NO >> GO TO 7.
EC
C
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. E

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS
ECM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005398635
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Remarks:
• Specification data are reference values.
• Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
*Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
I.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the
specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. this IGN TIMING
monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and
other ignition timing related sensors.
Monitor Item Condition Values/Status

Almost the same speed as
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
• Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1)
are met. 1.0 V
- Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at LEAN ←→ RICH
idle for 1 minute under no load
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8 V

ACCEL SEN 2
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 1-B1
• Selector lever position: D (A/T) or Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
1st (M/T)
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1
• Selector lever position: D (A/T) or Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
1st (M/T)
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Selector lever position: P or N (A/T) or
ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON Neutral (M/T)
Selector lever position: Except above OFF

ECM
A
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON EC
ON
and/or Lighting switch: 2nd position
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch and lighting
OFF
switch: OFF
C
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF D
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
E
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Selector lever position: P or N (A/
INJ PULSE-B1 T) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
F
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10 - 20°BTDC
G
IGN TIMING T) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25 - 45°BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10 - 35% H
CAL/LD VALUE T) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10 - 35%
• No load
I
• Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s

MASS AIRFLOW T) or Neutral (M/T) J
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% K
PURG VOL C/V T) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
• No load L
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5 - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1) T) or Neutral (M/T) M
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 40°CA
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0 - 2%
N
INT/V SOL (B1) T) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 90%
• No load O
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates) P
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch: ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON

ECM
Engine coolant temperature is 98°C
OFF
(208°F) or less
• Engine: After warning up, idle the
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
HIGH
(212°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VEHICLE SPEED
dication. the speedometer indication
Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET
formed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: running
Idle air volume learning has already been
CMPLT
performed successfully.
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
ON. (0 - 40,723 miles)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 40 - 100%
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
NOTE:
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1) —
The item is indicated, but not used.
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PBIA9221J
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

ECM
TERMI- A
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2 V EC
[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor • Engine stopped
1 L C
(Open) • Selector lever position: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIA8150J D
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE
2 SB [Ignition switch: ON]
supply (11 - 14 V)
Approximately 2.9 - 8.8 V E

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
3 G A/F sensor 1 heater • Idle speed F
(More than 140 seconds after starting en-
gine)
PBIA8148J G
0 - 14 V
[Ignition switch: ON] H

• Engine stopped
4 P Throttle control motor (Close)
• Selector lever position: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
I
PBIA8149J
Approximately 10 V J
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up K
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
5 G
heater minute under no load.
PBIA8148J L
• Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14 V) M
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting.
EVAP canister purge volume PBIB0050E

9 P
control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
10 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Body ground
11 B • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
15 Y Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14 V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V
0 - 0.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
17 R Ignition signal No. 1
18 LG Ignition signal No. 2 PBIA9265J
21 G Ignition signal No. 4

0.2 - 0.5 V
22 SB Ignition signal No. 3
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm.
PBIA9266J

• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0 V
ON
23 GR Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14 V)
switch ON

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V) EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle.
25 V Fuel injector No. 4
29 Y Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB0529E D
30 O Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
31 L Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14 V)
E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
F
PBIA4943J
G
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
28 W [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] H
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE I
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON] J
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
33 LG Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON] K
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
L
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released M
34 O Throttle position sensor 2
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Selector lever position: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) N
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
36 Y • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Throttle position sensor) O
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5 V
• Idle speed
P
Approximately 0 - 4.8 V
38 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with en-
sensor
gine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
40 — • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Knock sensor)
• Idle speed

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
41 GR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
EVAP control system pres-
42 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8 V
sure sensor
Fuel tank temperature sen-
43 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature
Sensor ground [Engine is running]
44 B (Engine coolant temperature • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sensor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.3 V
• Idle speed
45 G Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
46 V [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
48 BR (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running] Approximately 1.8 V
49 W A/F sensor 1 • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - 1.0 V
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
51 O (EVAP control system pres- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sure sensor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
52 LG • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Mass air flow sensor)
• Idle speed
53 B A/F sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.2 V
55 O (Intake air temperature sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
59 O • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
• Idle speed

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] EC
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm C
at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor JMBIA2185GB

61 W D
(POS)
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] E
F
JMBIA2186GB

62 R [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(POS)] • Idle speed
G
63 BR [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(PHASE)] • Idle speed H
Approximately 3.6
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
J
at idle.
Camshaft position sensor JMBIA2183GB

65 G
(PHASE)
Approximately 3.6 V K
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. L
JMBIA2184GB M
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Selector lever position: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(11 - 14 V)
69 L PNP signal (M/T)
N
Approximately 0 V
• Except above
Sensor power supply O
72 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(Throttle position sensor)

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V
Intake valve timing control
73 P [Engine is running]
solenoid valve
• When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quick-
ly
PBIA4937J
Sensor power supply

74 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sensor)
Sensor power supply
75 BR [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(POS)]
76 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sure sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
78 O [Camshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(PHASE)]
83 P CAN communication line — —
84 L CAN communication line — —
88 LG DATA link connector — —
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 O Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
Approximately 0 V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
99 R Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
102 SB (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sensor 2)
• Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6 V
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
103 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
104 Y (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sensor 2) • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
106 P (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
108 B ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
• Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9 V EC
110 G
C
111 R (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sensor 1) • Idle speed D
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

ECM
Wiring Diagram — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM — INFOID:0000000005398636
ABBWA0349GB

ECM
EC
AABWA0306GB
Fail Safe INFOID:0000000005398637 P
NON DTC RELATED ITEM

ECM
Engine operating condition in

Detected items Remarks
fail-safe mode
Malfunction indicator Engine speed will not rise When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by
lamp circuit more than 2,500 rpm due to lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system.
the fuel cut Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses
are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine
control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-
safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit
are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
DTC RELATED ITEM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a

ECM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
A
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. EC
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
C
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will not D
exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. E
P2128 condition.
F
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005398638
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. G
Priority Detected items (DTC)

H
1 • U0101 U0140 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0116 P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor I
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0128 Thermostat function
• P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 Knock sensor J
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor K
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0705 Transmission range switch
• P0850 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch L
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
M

ECM
2 • P0031 P0032 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P2A00 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• P0137 P0138 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
• P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
• P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply
• P0710 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors,
solenoid valves and switches
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
• P2118 Throttle control motor
3 • P0011 Intake valve timing control
• P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
• P0300 - P0304 Misfire
• P0420 Three way catalyst function
• P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
• P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
• P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
• P1148 Closed loop control
• P1421 Cold start control
• P1715 Input speed sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
DTC Index INFOID:0000000005398639
×:Applicable —: Not applicable

1
DTC* Permanent
Items SRT DTC Reference
CONSULT-III Trip MIL
(CONSULT-III screen terms) code page
ECM*3 group* 4
GST*2
U0101 0101*5 LOST COMM (TCM) — 1 × B EC-120
U0140 0140*5 LOST COMM (BCM) — 1 × B EC-122
U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 2 — — EC-120

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — Flashing*8 — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 × 2 × B EC-126
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × B EC-130
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × B EC-130
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × B EC-134
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × B EC-134
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 — 2 × B EC-138
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × B EC-142
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × B EC-156
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × B EC-156
P0116 0116 ECT SEN/CIRC — 2 × B EC-159
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × B EC-161

ECM
DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC Reference A
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × B EC-161 EC
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × B EC-165
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × B EC-165
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR — 2 × B EC-169 C
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR-B1 — 2 × B EC-172
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN — 2 × B EC-174
D
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × A EC-176
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × B EC-182
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × B EC-187 E
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) × 2 × A EC-192
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × A EC-198
F
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × A EC-206
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × A EC-215
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 — 2 × B EC-223 G
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 — 2 × B EC-229
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR — 2 × B EC-234
H
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × B EC-239
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × B EC-239
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × B EC-243 I
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × B EC-243
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × B EC-247
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × B EC-247 J
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × B EC-247
K
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — — EC-253
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — — EC-253 L
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × B EC-257
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 × B EC-262
M
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 × 2 × A EC-267
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON × 2 × A EC-272
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK × 2 × A EC-278 N
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × A EC-285
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × B EC-291
O
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × B EC-291
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE — 2 × B EC-295
P0448 0448 VENT CONTROL VALVE — 2 × B EC-300 P
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN — 2 × A EC-306
P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN — 2 × B EC-309
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN — 2 × B EC-316
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK — 2 × A EC-323
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK ×*7 2 × A EC-329

ECM
DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC Reference
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH — 2 × A EC-336
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR — 2 × B EC-337
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC — 2 × B EC-339
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC — 2 × B EC-339
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 — 2 × B EC-341
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM — 2 × B EC-343
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM — 2 × B EC-345
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT — 2 × B EC-347
P0605 0605 ECM — 1 or 2 × or — B EC-349
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
P0607 0607 ECM — B EC-351
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC — 1 × B EC-352
P0705 0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A — 2 × B AT-90
P0710 0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A*9 — 2 × B AT-95
P0720 0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR*6 — 2 × B AT-100

P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED — 2 × B AT-105
P0731 0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO*9 — 2 × B AT-109

P0740 0740 TORQUE CONVERTER — 2 × B AT-123
P0744 0744 TORQUE CONVERTER — 2 × B AT-128
P0745 0745 PC SOLENOID A — 2 × B AT-133
P0750 0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A — 1 × B AT-138
P0755 0755 SHIFT SOLENOID B — 1 × B AT-143
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT — 2 × B EC-356
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 — 1 × A EC-361
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP — 1 × B EC-362
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — — EC-366
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — — EC-368
P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL — 2 × A EC-370
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE — 2 — — BL-259
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM — 2 — — BL-259
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU — 2 — — BL-259
P1613 1613 ECM INT CIRC-IMMC — 2 — — BL-259
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY — 2 — — BL-259
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY — 2 — — BL-259
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED — 2 — — EC-372
P1760 1760 OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID — 2 × B AT-148
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT — 2 — — EC-373
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 — 1 × B EC-377
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 — 1 × B EC-381

ECM
DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC Reference A
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR — 1 × B EC-377 EC
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 — 1 × B EC-386
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 — 1 × B EC-390
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × B EC-392 C
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × B EC-392
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × B EC-396
D
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × B EC-396
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 — 1 × B EC-401
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR — 1 × B EC-405 E
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × A EC-410
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
F
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: Refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description", “PERMANENT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (PERMANENT DTC)”.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
G
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*7: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*8: When the ECM is in the mode that displays SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to “How to Display SRT Status” in EC-
H
84, "Diagnosis Description".
*9: When erasing this DTC, always use CONSULT-III or GST.
I
How to Set SRT Code INFOID:0000000005656812
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnoses for the SRT items must be performed one or more times. Refer to EC-84,
"Diagnosis Description", “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”, “SRT Item”. J
Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE one by one based on Performance Priority in K
the table on “SRT Item”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat- L
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

ECM
DRIVING PATTERN
JMBIA2929GB
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road A
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
EC
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V). C
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is lower than 1.4 V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage D
between the ECM terminal 43 and ground is less than 4.1 V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. E
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed F
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving. G
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted
again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 H
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
PBIB2244E
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. I
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models

Set the selector lever in the D position.
J
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
K
and individual driving habits.
For quick acceleration in low alti-

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas L
tude areas and high altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift position [km/h (MPH)] CRUISE shift point [km/h (MPH)] km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 15 (9) 21 (13) 15 (9) M
2nd to 3rd 25 (16) 38 (24) 30 (19)
3rd to 4th 40 (25) 55 (34) 45 (28)
N
4th to 5th 45 (28) 74 (46) 50 (31)
How to Erase Permanent DTC INFOID:0000000005647832

O
When a DTC is stored in ECM
When a DTC is stored in ECM and MIL is ON, a permanent DTC is erased with MIL shutoff if the same mal-
function is not detected after performing the driving pattern for MIL shutoff three times in a raw. P

ECM
JSBIA0063GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal-
will illuminate. functions.
When a DTC is not stored in ECM

The erasing method depends on a permanent DTC stored in ECM. Refer to the following table.
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” Driving pattern

Group* for applicable DTCs. B D
A × — —
B — × ×
*: For group, refer to EC-468, "DTC Index".
Group A

ECM
EC
I
JSBIA0064GB

tected in two consecutive trips, MIL J
will illuminate.

K
4. Turn ignition switch ON. L
5. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description".
6. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for DTCs which are the same as permanent DTCs stored
in ECM. M
9. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. N
12. Check that the permanent DTCs have been erased. O
Group B
P

ECM
JSBIA0068GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: After experiencing Driving pattern B *3: Indication does not change unless
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL and D, permanent DTC is erased. the ignition switch is turned from ON
will illuminate. to OFF twice even after experiencing
Driving pattern B or D.
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle according to only driving patterns indicating “INCMP” in driving patterns B and D on the
“PERMANENT DTC STATUS” screen.
• When experiencing both driving pattern B and D during the same trip, the experience of driving pattern D is
counted by priority.
7. Drive the vehicle according to driving pattern D.
CAUTION:
• Always drive at a safe speed.
• Never erase self-diagnosis results.
• If self-diagnosis results are erased during the trip of driving pattern B or D, the counter of driving
pattern B or D is reset.
• If self-diagnosis results are erased during the trip of driving pattern B or D, an experience of driv-
ing pattern B and D during the same trip is not counted up.

ECM
12. Use “PERMANENT DTC WORK SUPPORT” to drive the vehicle according to driving pattern B. A
CAUTION:
• Never erase self-diagnosis results. EC
ing pattern B and D during the same trip is not counted up. C
D
17. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-84, "Diagnosis Description". E
18. Check that the permanent DTCs have been erased.
DRIVING PATTERN
F
Driving Pattern B
Driving pattern B means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
• Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more.
• Water temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more. G
• Vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (44 – 75 MPH) is maintained for 60 seconds or more under the control of
closed loop.
• Vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) is maintained for 10 seconds or more under the control of H
closed loop.
• Under the closed loop control condition, the following state reaches 12 seconds or more in total: Vehicle
speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less with idling condition.
• The state of driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more reaches 10 minutes or more in total. I
• A lapse of 22 minutes or more after engine start.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed. J
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle at a constant velocity.
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern
K
B.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern B.
L
Driving Pattern D
Driving pattern D means operating vehicle as per the following.
• The state of driving at 40 km/h (25 MPH) reaches 300 seconds or more in total.
• Idle speed lasts 30 seconds or more. M
• A lapse of 600 seconds or more after engine start.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed. N
NOTE:
D.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving O
pattern D.
Test Value and Test Limit INFOID:0000000005653465
P
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.

ECM
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)
Test value and Test

limit
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
01H
(Bank 1)
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to
P014C 8DH 04H
Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
P014C 8EH 04H
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to
P014D 8FH 84H
Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
HO2S
P014D 90H 84H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to
P015A 91H 01H
P015A 92H 01H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to
P015B 93H 01H
P015B 94H 01H
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
E
P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
F
G
05H
(Bank 2)
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to H
P014E 8DH 04H
P014E 8EH 04H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 I
P014F 8FH 84H
HO2S
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to J
P014F 90H 84H
P015C 91H 01H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 K
P015C 92H 01H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to L
P015D 93H 01H
P015D 94H 01H
Rich Bank 2 Sensor 1 M
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test N

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0159 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage O
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for test P

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
P0430 82H 01H
22H
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0011 80H 9DH
alignment check diagnosis)
VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
P0014 81H 9DH
35H VVT Monitor (Bank1)
P0011 82H 9DH
drive failure diagnosis)
P0014 83H 9DH
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
C
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02 D
P0456 80H 05H
inch)
EVAP
SYSTEM EVAP control system leak Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
3CH P0456 81H FDH
(Very small leak) system during monitoring
E
Internal pressure of EVAP system at the
P0456 82H FDH
end of monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
F
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH G
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input:P0038 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- H
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) rent to voltage
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
(Bank 2) High Input:P0052 rent to voltage I
46H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- J
47H P0063 80H 0CH
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected K
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump L
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
Second- Secondary Air Injection System High
71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
ary Air Airflow M
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
P2440 85H 01H

Secondary Air Injection System Switch- N
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
O
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM
Fuel injection system function P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim P
82H

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
A3H No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005398642
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-428
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-496
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-424
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-68
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-449
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-24
EC-381
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-390
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-24
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-434
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-115
EC-142
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-142
1
EC-161
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-169
EC-176
3 EC-182
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-187
EC-192
EC-410
EC-165
EC-243
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-366
EC-368
2 2 EC-401
EC-392
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 EC-396
EC-405
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-253

SYMPTOM
A

EC



Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-257 F
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-262
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-341
G
EC-347
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-349
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir- H
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-138
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-356
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-450 I
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-421
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 MTC-23
J
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-10
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next table)
K
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code A

AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
A
Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-5
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gas- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
oline, Low octane)
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
EM-26
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — elec-
tric throttle control actuator) 5 5 5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actua- 5 5 5 5
tor
EM-28
Air leakage from intake mani-
fold/Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-21
Starter circuit 3 SC-9
1
Signal plate 6 EM-90
PNP switch (M/T)
MT-13 (M/T)
Transmission range switch 4
AT-94 (A/T)
(A/T)
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-73
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-90
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E
Warranty symptom code A

AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
A F
Valve Timing chain EM-49
mecha-
Camshaft EM-59
nism G
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-49
Intake valve
3 EM-76
Exhaust valve H
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muf-
fler/Gasket EM-31
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-5
Three way catalyst I
Lubrica- EM-39
tion Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/ EM-42
Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-7 J
LU-9
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler CO-15 K
cap CO-15
Thermostat 5 CO-24
Water pump CO-22 L
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-10
Cooling fan CO-20
5 M
Coolant level (Low)/Contami-
CO-10
nated coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
1 1 BL-257 N
tem — NATS)

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)

If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-36,
"System Description".

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [HR16DE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EC
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006046361
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a I
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000006046362 K
NOTE:
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM). L
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
″LOCK″ position.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. M
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech-
anism is adopted on the key cylinder.
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and N
steering wheel rotation will become impossible.
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before
starting the repair operation. O
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE: P
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the
steering lock will be released.
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.

PRECAUTIONS
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000005662058
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000005398646
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "Description".
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000005398647
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect negative battery cable.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not disassemble ECM.
• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to A
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Thus,
engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
EC
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be cleared within 24 hours. C
PBIA9222J
- Freeze frame data D
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector (1), fasten (B) it E
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
2. ECM
F
A. Loosen
PBIB2947E
H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or I
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors. J
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs. K
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
L
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. M
Refer to EC-454, "Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. N
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), O
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D

PRECAUTIONS
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function
Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confir-
mation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Component
Function Check should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted.
SEF217U
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
SEF348N
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
- Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1)
- Fuel pressure regulator (2)
- Fuel level sensor (3)
- Fuel tank temperature sensor (4)
BBIA0704E

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar- A
ily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
EC
SEF709Y
D
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location. E
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls. F
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
ratio can be kept smaller. G
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [HR16DE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000005398648
NOTE:
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J-44321) Checks fuel pressure
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connects fuel pressure gauge to quick connector

Fuel pressure adapter type fuel lines.
LBIA0376E
KV10118400 Measures fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000005398649
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locates the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applies positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [HR16DE]
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.) A
Fuel filler cap adapter Checks fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
EC
C
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removes and installs engine coolant temperature

sensor D
S-NT705
F
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditions the exhaust system threads before
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco- G
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
H
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricates oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

(PermatexTM
i.e.: when reconditioning exhaust system threads. I
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
J
S-NT779

FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [HR16DE]
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
FUEL PRESSURE
Inspection INFOID:0000000005398650
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because C11 models do not have fuel return system.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C,
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in
manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check B and fuel tube
adapter (KV10118400) D, then connect fuel pressure gauge A.
• : To quick connector
• : To fuel tube (engine side)
• C: Clamp
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine
NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moder-
ately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with dam-
age or cracks on it. PBIB2982E
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-152, "Removal and Installation".
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

FUEL PRESSURE
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check (1) to fuel tube
(engine side) with clamp (2) as shown in the figure. A
• No.2 spool (5)
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
EC
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
(3) and No.1 spool (4).
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube. C
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710
or 16439 40U00).
PBIB2983E
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. D
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb) E
• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector.
F
• A: Fuel pressure gauge
• B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
6. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel G
tube does not come off.
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
H
8. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
9. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating.
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
PBIB2984E
I
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
J
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
10. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
11. Check the following. K
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging L
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
12. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure M
to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".

EVAP LEAK CHECK
EVAP LEAK CHECK
CAUTION:
• Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: (J-41413-OBD)] to the EVAP
service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Install EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: (J-
41413-OBD)] and pressure pump to EVAP service port.
3. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
5. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
6. Remove EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: (J- SEF462UA
41413-OBD)] and hose with pressure pump.
7. Locate the leak using a leak detector [commercial service tool:
(J-41416)]. Refer to EC-68, "System Description".
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
1. Install EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: (J-
41413-OBD)] and pressure pump to EVAP service port.
2. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister
vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system.
3. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
4. Remove EVAP service port adapter [commercial service tool: (J-
41413-OBD)] and hose with pressure pump.
SEF462UA

EVAP LEAK CHECK
5. Locate the leak using a leak detector [commercial service tool:
(J-41416)]. Refer to EC-68, "System Description". A
EC
SEF200U

EVAP CANISTER
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [HR16DE]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
EVAP CANISTER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005398652
PBIB1214E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005398653
EVAP CANISTER
Removal
1. Remove EVAP canister protector.
2. Disconnect the EVAP control pressure sensor connector.
3. Remove the EVAP control pressure sensor and O-ring, if necessary.
4. Disconnect EVAP canister purge hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister retaining bolt.
6. Disconnect fuel tank EVAP breather hose.
7. Disconnect EVAP vent control valve connector.
8. Disconnect the EVAP vent control valve hose.
9. Remove the EVAP canister.
10. Remove the EVAP vent control valve and O-ring, if necessary.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Always replace O-rings with a new one.
EVAP CANISTER CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal
3. Remove the EVAP canister control pressure sensor and O-ring.
Installation
CAUTION:
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EVAP CANISTER
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [HR16DE]
2. Disconnect EVAP vent control valve connector. A
4. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
EC
5. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
PBIB3082E
D
Installation
CAUTION:
Always replace O-ring with a new one. E
Check EVAP canister as per the following: F

1. Block port (B).
2. Blow air into port (A) and confirm that it flows freely out of port
(C). G
3. Release blocked port (B).
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port (B) and confirm that vacuum
H
pressure exists at the ports (A) and (C).
5. Block port (A) and (B).
6. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1212E
I

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [HR16DE]

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000005398655
Transmission Condition Specification

A/T No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm
*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000005398656
Transmission Condition Specification

A/T No load* (in P or N position) 6 ± 5°BTDC
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 6 ± 5°BTDC
*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000005398657
Condition Specification (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 10 – 35 %
At 2,500 rpm 10 – 35 %
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000005398658
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)

Output voltage at idle 0.9 – 1.3V*
1.0 – 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
2.0 – 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.

INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION > [MR18DE]
SERVICE INFORMATION A
INDEX FOR DTC
U0101-U1001 INFOID:0000000005532361
EC
DTC*1
Items C
CONSULT-III Reference
ECM*3 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
GST*2
U0101 0101*4 LOST COMM (TCM) EC-639 D
U0140 0140*4 LOST COMM (BCM) EC-641
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-643

E
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. F
P0011-P0075 INFOID:0000000005532362
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-III Reference H
GST*2
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-645
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-649
I
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-649

P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-654 J
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-654
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-659
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. K
L
P0101-P0128 INFOID:0000000005532363
M
DTC*1
Items
GST*2
N
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-664
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-672
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-672 O
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-679
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-679
P
P0116 0116 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-683
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-691
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-691
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-696

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
ECM* 3 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
GST*2
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR-B1 EC-699
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-702
P0130-P0183 INFOID:0000000005532364
DTC*1
Items
ECM* 3 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
GST*2
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-704
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-710
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-716
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-722
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-731
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-741
P014C 014C A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-750
P014D 014D A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-750
P015A 015A A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-750
P015B 015B A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-750
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-758
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-764
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-770
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-774
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-774
P0222-P0420 INFOID:0000000005532365
DTC*1
Items
2
GST*
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-778
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-778
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-783
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-783
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-789
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-789

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
Reference
A
CONSULT-III 3 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
2 ECM*
GST*
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-793
EC
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-799
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-805
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. C
D
P0441-P0463 INFOID:0000000005532366
DTC*1 E
Items
GST*2
F
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-810
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-815
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-822 G
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-830
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-830
H
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-836
P0448 0448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-842
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-848 I
P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-851
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-858
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-866 J
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-873
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-881
K
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-883
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-885
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-885 L
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. M
P0500-P0643 INFOID:0000000005532367
N
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3 (CONSULT-III screen terms) O
GST*
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-887
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-889 P
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-891
P0605 0605 ECM EC-893
P0607 0607 ECM EC-895
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-896

INDEX FOR DTC
P0705-P0734 INFOID:0000000005532368
DTC*1
Items
2
GST*
AT-90 (A/T)
P0705 0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A
CVT-62 (CVT)
AT-95 (A/T)
P0710 0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A*4 CVT-67 (CVT)
P0715 0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR AC CVT-72
AT-100 (A/T)
P0720 0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
CVT-76 (CVT)
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED AT-105
P0731 0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO*4 AT-109

P0740-P0840 INFOID:0000000005532369
DTC*1
Items
GST*2
AT-123 (A/T)
P0740 0740 TORQUE CONVERTERC
CVT-84 (CVT)
AT-128 (A/T)
P0744 0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
CVT-89 (CVT)
AT-133 (A/T)
P0745 0745 PC SOLENOID A
CVT-91 (CVT)
P0746 0746 PC SOLENOID A CVT-96
P0750 0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A AT-138
P0755 0755 SHIFT SOLENOID B AT-143
P0776 0776 PC SOLENOID B CVT-98
P0778 0778 PC SOLENOID B CVT-100
P0840 0840 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A CVT-105

INDEX FOR DTC
P0850-P1574 INFOID:0000000005532370
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-III (CONSULT-III screen terms)
Reference EC
ECM*3
GST*2
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-901
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-907 C
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-908
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-909
D
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-910
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-919
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-921 E
P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL EC-923
P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-925
F
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-931
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-940
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. G
H
P1610-P1615 INFOID:0000000005532371
DTC*1 I
Items
GST*2
J
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE BL-259
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM BL-259
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU BL-259 K
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY BL-259
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY BL-259
L
M
P1715-P1805 INFOID:0000000005532372
N
DTC*1
Items
GST*2 O
EC-942 (A/T)
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED
EC-942 (CVT)
P1740 1740 SLCT SOLENOID CVT-124 P
P1760 1760 OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-148
P1777 1777 STEP MOTOR CVT-129
P1778 1778 STEP MOTOR CVT-133
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-944

INDEX FOR DTC
P2100-P2A00 INFOID:0000000005532373
DTC*1
Items
2
GST*
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 EC-948
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 EC-952
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR EC-948
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 EC-958
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 EC-963
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-965
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 EC-977
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-982
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-989

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
A
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006046363
EC
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS C
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual. D
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury. I
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect J
INFOID:0000000006046364
NOTE:
K
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM).
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
″LOCK″ position. L
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech- M
anism is adopted on the key cylinder.
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
steering wheel rotation will become impossible.
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before N
starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the P
steering lock will be released.
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)

PRECAUTIONS
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000005532375
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T, CVT INFOID:0000000005532376
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause
the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66.
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000005532377
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect negative battery cable.
SEF289H
• Do not disassemble ECM.

• If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the
initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
PBIA9222J

PRECAUTIONS
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data A
- Test values
EC
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
- ECM (2) C
- Loosen (A)
E
PBIB2947E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or F

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors. G
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam- H
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E I
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer- J
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-605, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. K
• Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious L
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS). M
MEF040D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. N
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. O
SEF217U

PRECAUTIONS
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
SEF348N
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
- Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1)
- Fuel pressure regulator (2)
- Fuel level sensor (3)
- Fuel tank temperature sensor (4)
BBIA0704E
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar-
ily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y

PRECAUTIONS
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic A
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
EC
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave C
radio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000005532378
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Tool name
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure
Fuel pressure gauge
Kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

Fuel pressure adapter tor type fuel lines.
LBIA0376E
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000005532379
Tool number
Tool name
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704

PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description A
Tool name
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure EC
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera- D

ture sensor
S-NT705 F
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below. G
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor H
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool I

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907) J
S-NT779
K

Schematic INFOID:0000000005532380
JPBIA3134GB
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System INFOID:0000000005532381

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
EC
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas C
Fuel injection D
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position
& mixture ratio Fuel injector
Battery Battery voltage*3 control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition E

EPS control unit Power steering operation*2
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

F
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor. J
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below. K
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up L
• When starting the engine
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T and CVT models) M
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration N
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
O
PBIB3020E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air/fuel mixture ratio for drivability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-704. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air/fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air/fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration
• Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D (A/T and CVT models)
• When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com-
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.

This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
A
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
EC
Electronic Ignition (EI) System INFOID:0000000005532382
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART C

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 D
E

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing
Power transistor F
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position G
Vehicle speed*1
Combination meter H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. J
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in K
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle L
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed M
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
N
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000005532383
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART O

Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Neutral position P
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Engine speed
Vehicle speed*
Combination meter

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,400 rpm under no load [for example, the shift lever position is P or N (A/T,
CVT), Neutral (M/T) and engine speed is over 2,400 rpm] fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time
when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-516, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) Sys-
tem".

A
Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000005532384
EC
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*1
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature D

Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
Battery Battery voltage*2 cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure E
EPS control unit 1
Power steering operation*
Vehicle speed*1 F
Combination meter
G
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. H
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
I
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low. J
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal Gear position ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit) Vehicle speed*
Combination meter
TCM Powertrain revolution*
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed
until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than two switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
• Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T and CVT models)
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION

When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. A
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition EC
must meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released.
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) C
• Selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T and CVT models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description INFOID:0000000005532387 D
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-925. E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-931 and EC-996.
F
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-931 and EC-996.
STOP LAMP SWITCH G
Refer to EC-931, EC-944and EC-996.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-948, EC-952, EC-958and EC-963. H
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-1004.
I

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart", about CAN communication for detail.

A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
G
PBIB3639E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
H
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating. J
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

PBIB3330E
: Vehicle front : From next figure

1. Intake manifold collector 2. EVAP canister purge volume con- 3. EVAP service port
trol solenoid valve
NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

EC
L
BBIA0692E
(A): To previous figure M

1. EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister 3. EVAP canister vent control valve
NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
N
EVAP CANISTER O

Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port (B).
2. Blow air into port (A) and confirm that it flows freely out of port
(C).
3. Release blocked port (B).
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port (B) and confirm that vacuum
pressure exists at the ports (A) and (C).
5. Block port (A) and (B).
6. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1212E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
SEF445Y
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa

(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa
(−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor- SEF943S
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EVAP SERVICE PORT

Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a A
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UC
D
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005962108
PBIB1214E J
K
EVAP CANISTER
Removal
1. Remove EVAP canister protector. L
3. Remove the EVAP control pressure sensor and O-ring, if necessary.
M
4. Disconnect EVAP canister purge hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister retaining bolt.
6. Disconnect fuel tank EVAP breather hose. N
9. Remove the EVAP canister. O
10. Remove the EVAP vent control valve and O-ring, if necessary.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
Always replace O-rings with a new one.
EVAP CANISTER CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal

3. Remove the EVAP canister control pressure sensor and O-ring.
Installation
CAUTION:
4. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
5. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
PBIB3082E
Installation
CAUTION:
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage INFOID:0000000005532392
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar
graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-525,
"Description".
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III

1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port. A
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
EC
SEF462UC
D
3. Apply battery voltage to the terminal of EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve (3) to make a closed EVAP system.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (1) E
• EVAP canister (2)
G
BBIA0693E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to H
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
I
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-525, "Description".

PBIB1387E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".
- Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
• Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.

attached.
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
EC
PBIB1213E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER D

E
>> GO TO 4.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> Replace drain filter.
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. H

I
OK or NG J
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG K
WHILE REFUELING.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER L
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor M
attached.
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER O

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1213E

>> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

6.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
7.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
11.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II A
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.

2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
EC
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank. C
OK or NG
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve D
with fuel tank.
E
SEF665U
F
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-III
G
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. H
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. I
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
the air flows freely into the tank. J
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. K
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer L

BBIA0694E

Without CONSULT-III
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer

EC
H
BBIA0694E

I
DRAIN FILTER
1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet. J
K
5. Block port B.
6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage. L
7. If NG, replace drain filter.
N
PBIB3641E

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0686GB
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC
D
S-ET277

NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
• If the security indicator illuminates with the ignition switch ON or DTC P1610 - P1615 is displayed in
“SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT” mode, perform the trouble diagnosis for corresponding to the
detected DTC. Refer to EC-503, "U0101-U1001".
• Check that no DTC is displayed in “SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT” mode of “BCM” before erasing the
detected DTC in “ENGINE” mode with CONSULT-III.
• When replacing ECM, refer to EC-579, "Procedure After Replacing ECM".

A
Introduction INFOID:0000000005532399
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua- EC
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

C
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 D
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
E
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5
Permanent Diagnostic Trouble Code (Permanent DTC) Service $0A* of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 F
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable G
Freeze 1st trip Freeze Permanent
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data DTC status
CONSULT-III × × × × × × — × H
GST × × × — × × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × — —
I
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
(Refer to EC-590, "Fail-Safe Chart".) J
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000005532400
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the K
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd L
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
M
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC

1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip N
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst O

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst P
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-542, "Emission-relat- — × — — × — — —
ed Diagnostic Information".)
Except above — — — × — × × —

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000005532401
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC
CONSULT-III Trip MIL Reference
(CONSULT-III screen terms) code
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
LOST COMM (TCM) U0101 0101*5 — 1 × B EC-639
LOST COMM (BCM) U0140 0140*5 — 1 × B EC-641
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — 2 — — EC-643

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — Flashing*6 — EC-565
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 × 2 × B EC-645
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — 2 × B EC-649
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — 2 × B EC-649
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — 2 × B EC-654
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — 2 × B EC-654
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — 2 × B EC-659
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0101 0101 — 2 × B EC-664
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × B EC-679
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × B EC-679
ECT SEN/CIRC P0116 0116 — 2 × B EC-683
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × B EC-686
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × B EC-686
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × B EC-691
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × B EC-691
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — 2 × B EC-696
IAT SENSOR-B1 P0127 0127 — 2 × B EC-699
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — 2 × B EC-702
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — 2 × A EC-704
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — 2 × B EC-710
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × B EC-716
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × 2 × A EC-722
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × 2 × A EC-731
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × A EC-741
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P014C 014C — 2 × A EC-750

DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC
A
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P014D 014D — 2 × A EC-750 EC
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P015A 015A — 2 × A EC-750
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P015B 015B — 2 × A EC-750
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × B EC-758 C
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × B EC-764
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — 2 × B EC-770
D
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — 2 × B EC-774
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — 2 × B EC-774
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × B EC-778 E
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × B EC-778
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 1 or 2 × B EC-783
F
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 1 or 2 × B EC-783
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — 1 or 2 × B EC-783 G
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — — EC-789
H
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — 2 — — EC-789
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × B EC-793
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × B EC-799 I
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × A EC-805
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × 2 × A EC-810
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × 2 × A EC-815 J
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — 2 × A EC-822
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — 2 × B EC-830
K
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — 2 × B EC-830
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — 2 × B EC-836
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — 2 × B EC-842 L
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — 2 × A EC-848
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — 2 × B EC-851
M
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — 2 × B EC-858
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — 2 × A EC-866
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×* 7 2 × A EC-873 N
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — 2 × A EC-881
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — 2 × B EC-883
O
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — 2 × B EC-885
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — 2 × B EC-885
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*8 P0500 0500 — 2 × B EC-887 P

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — 2 × B EC-889
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — 2 × B EC-891
ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 — or × B EC-893
1 (CVT) × (CVT)
ECM P0607 0607 — 1 (A/T) × (A/T) B EC-893
2 (M/T) — (M/T)

DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC
2 ECM*3 group*4
GST*
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — 1 × B EC-896
AT-90 (A/T)
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 0705 — 2 × B CVT-62
(CVT)
AT-95 (A/T)
2 (A/T)
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A*9 P0710 0710 — × B CVT-67
1 (CVT)
(CVT)
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0715 0715 — 2 × B CVT-72
AT-100 (A/T)
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR*8 P0720 0720 — 2 × B CVT-76
(CVT)
ENGINE SPEED P0725 0725 — 2 × B AT-105
1GR INCORRECT RATIO*9 P0731 0731 — 2 × B AT-109

AT-123 (A/T)
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 0740 — 2 × B CVT-84
(CVT)
AT-128 (A/T)
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 0744 — 2 × B CVT-89
(CVT)
AT-133 (A/T)
PC SOLENOID A P0745 0745 — 2 × B CVT-91
(CVT)
PC SOLENOID A P0746 0746 — 1 × B CVT-96
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 0750 — 1 × B AT-138
SHIFT SOLENOID B P0755 0755 — 1 × B AT-143
PC SOLENOID B P0776 0776 — 2 × B CVT-98
PC SOLENOID B P0778 0778 — 2 × B CVT-100
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A P0840 0840 — 2 × B CVT-105
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — 2 × B EC-901
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — 1 × A EC-907
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — 2 — — EC-908
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — 2 — — EC-909
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × B EC-910
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — — EC-919
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — — EC-921
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — 2 × A EC-923
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — 1 — — EC-925
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — 1 — — EC-931
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — 1 — — EC-940
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — — BL-259
ID DISCORD,IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — — BL-259
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — — BL-259
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — — BL-259

DTC*1 Permanent
Items SRT DTC
A
ECM*3 group*4
GST*2
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — — BL-259 EC
EC-942 (A/T)
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — 2 — — EC-942
(CVT)
C
SLCT SOLENOID P1740 1740 — 2 × B CVT-124
OVER CLUTCH SOLENOID P1760 1760 — 2 × B AT-148
STEP MOTOR P1777 1777 — 1 × B CVT-129 D
STEP MOTOR P1778 1778 — 2 × B CVT-133
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — — EC-944
E
ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2100 2100 — 1 × B EC-948
ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 P2101 2101 — 1 × B EC-952
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — 1 × B EC-948 F
ETC MOT-B1 P2118 2118 — 1 × B EC-958
ETC ACTR-B1 P2119 2119 — 1 × B EC-963
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × B EC-965 G
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × B EC-965
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × B EC-970 H
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × B EC-970
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × B EC-977
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × B EC-982 I
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — 2 × A EC-989
J
*4: Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “PERMANENT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (PERMANENT DTC)”.
K
*6: When the ECM in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to "How to Display SRT Status".
*7: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
L
*8: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC M

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
N
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, O
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the P
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.

1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without light-
ing up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not
prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-585, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per-
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
function is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
NO TOOLS
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST and the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-III.
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-612, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T or CVT related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOS-
TIC INFORMATION ITEMS".

SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. A
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. EC
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains C
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. D
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con- E
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE: F
If permanent DTC is stored or MIL illuminates during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also
returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is
important to check SRT (“CMPLT”), DTC (No DTCs) and permanent DTC (No permanent DTCs) before the
inspection. G
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
H
SRT item Perfor-
(CONSULT-III indica- mance Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
tion) Priority* I
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
J
HO2S 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 — K
L
EGR/VVT SYSTEM 3 Intake value timing control function P0011

*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for M
models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is N
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
O
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
P

All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

EC
L
JSBIA0065GB
How to Display SRT Status M

WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. N
NOTE:
• Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
• “SRT STATUS” provides the presence or absence of permanent DTCs stored in ECM memory. O
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS P
A SRT code itself cannot be displayed, however SRT status can.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL illuminates continuously.

• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will blink periodically for 10 seconds.
JMBIA1515GB
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on "SRT Item".
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat-
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Driving Pattern
A
EC
JSBIA0162GB
P
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V).
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is lower than 1.4 V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 43 and ground is less than 4.1 V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
PBIB2244E
Pattern 4:
• Operate vehicle, following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
- Drive the vehicle in a proper gear at 60 km/h (38 MPH) and main-
tain the speed.
- Release the accelerator pedal fully at least 5 seconds.
- Repeat the above two steps at least 5 times.
JSBIA0160GB
Pattern 5:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T and CVT Models

Set the selector lever in the D position.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low alti- A

For quick acceleration in low alti- For high attitude areas
tude areas
tude areas [over 1,219m (4,000 ft)]:
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
EC
1st to 2nd 13 (8) 24 (15) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 27 (17) 40 (25) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 40 (25) 53 (33) 65 (40) C
4th to 5th 58 (36) 71 (44) 72 (45)
5th to 6th 82 (51) 82 (51) 82 (51)
D
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi- E
tions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
F
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 50 (30)
2nd 90 (55) G
3rd —
4th —
H
5th —
6th —
PERMANENT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (PERMANENT DTC) I

Permanent DTC is defined in SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 Service $0A.
ECM stores a DTC issuing a command of turning on MIL as a permanent DTC and keeps storing the DTC as
a permanent DTC until ECM judges that there is no presence of malfunction. J
Permanent DTCs cannot be erased by using the Erase function of CONSULT-III or Generic Scan Tool (GST)
and by disconnecting the battery to shut off power to ECM. This prevents a vehicle from passing the state
emission inspection without repairing a malfunctioning part. K
When not passing the state emission inspection due to more than one permanent DTC, permanent DTCs
should be erased, referring to this manual.
NOTE:
• The important items in state emission inspection are that MIL is not ON, SRT test items are set, and perma- L
nent DTCs are not included.
• Permanent DTCs do not apply for regions that permanent DTCs are not regulated by law.
Permanent DTC Item M
For permanent DTC items, MIL turns ON. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS”.
Permanent DTC Set Timing N
The setting timing of permanent DTC is stored in ECM with the lighting of MIL when a DTC is confirmed.
Permanent DTC Service Procedure
O

JSBIA0066GB
How to Display Permanent DTC Status
WITH CONSULT-III
5. Select “PERMANENT DTC STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Permanent DTCs stored in ECM memory are displayed on the CONSULT-III screen to show if a driving
pattern required for erasing permanent DTCs is complete (CMPLT) or incomplete (INCMP).
CAUTION:
Since the “PERMANENT DTC STATUS” screen displays the previous trip information, repeat the
following twice to update the information: “Ignition switch OFF”, “Wait for more than 10 seconds”
and “Ignition switch ON”.
JSBIA0062GB

WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
EC
5. Select Service $0A with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. C
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and D
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed) E

Test value and Test

limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
01H
(Bank 1)
P014C 8DH 04H
P014C 8EH 04H
P014D 8FH 84H
HO2S
P014D 90H 84H
P015A 91H 01H
P015A 92H 01H
P015B 93H 01H
P015B 94H 01H
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle

Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
E
P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
F
G
05H
(Bank 2)
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to H
P014E 8DH 04H
P014E 8EH 04H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 I
P014F 8FH 84H
HO2S
O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to J
P014F 90H 84H
P015C 91H 01H
Lean Bank 2 Sensor 1 K
P015C 92H 01H
O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to L
P015D 93H 01H
P015D 94H 01H
Rich Bank 2 Sensor 1 M
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test N

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0159 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage O
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for test P

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle

Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
P0420 82H 01H
21H
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
P0430 82H 01H
22H
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
P0011 80H 9DH
P0014 81H 9DH
P0011 82H 9DH
P0014 83H 9DH
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH

Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
C
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02 D
P0456 80H 05H
inch)
EVAP
SYSTEM EVAP control system leak Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
3CH P0456 81H FDH
(Very small leak) system during monitoring
E
Internal pressure of EVAP system at the
P0456 82H FDH
end of monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
F
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH G
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
42H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- H
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
(Bank 2) High Input:P0052 rent to voltage I
46H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- J
47H P0063 80H 0CH
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected K
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump L
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
Second- Secondary Air Injection System High
71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
ary Air Airflow M
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
P2440 85H 01H

Secondary Air Injection System Switch- N
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
O
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
FUEL
SYSTEM
Fuel injection system function P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim P
82H

Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
ing cycles
C
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-III P
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T or CVT related items (see EC-503), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM.
2. Select "ENGINE" with CONSULT-III.
3. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".

4. Touch "ERASE". (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
With GST
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 sec-
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
No Tools
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 sec-
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
How to Erase Permanent DTC
When a DTC is stored in ECM

• When a DTC is stored in ECM and MIL is ON, a permanent DTC is erased with MIL shutoff if the same mal-
function is not detected after performing the driving pattern for MIL shutoff three times in a raw.
JSBIA0063GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal-
will illuminate. functions.
When a DTC is not stored in ECM

• The erasing method depends on a permanent DTC stored in ECM. Refer to the following table.
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” Driving pattern

Group* for applicable DTCs. B D
A × — —
B — × ×
*: For group, refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
ITEMS”.
Group A

EC
I
JSBIA0064GB

tected in two consecutive trips, MIL J
will illuminate.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
5. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “How to Display Per- L
manent DTC Status”.
6. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for DTCs which are the same as permanent DTCs stored
in ECM.
M
10. Turn ignition switch ON. N
11. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “How to Display Per-
O
Group B

JSBIA0068GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: After experiencing Driving pattern B *3: Indication does not change unless
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL and D, permanent DTC is erased. the ignition switch is turned from ON
will illuminate. to OFF twice even after experiencing
Driving pattern B or D.
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle according to only driving patterns indicating “INCMP” in driving patterns B and D on the
“PERMANENT DTC STATUS” screen.
• When experiencing both driving pattern B and D during the same trip, the experience of driving pattern D is
counted by priority.
5. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “How to Display Per-
7. Drive the vehicle according to driving pattern D.
CAUTION:
12. Use “PERMANENT DTC WORK SUPPORT” to drive the vehicle according to driving pattern B.

CAUTION:
• Always drive at a safe speed. A
EC
14. Turn ignition switch ON. C
17. Check permanent DTC. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information", “How to Display Per- D
DRIVING PATTERN E
Driving Pattern B
• Driving pattern B means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
- Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more. F
- Water temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more.
- Vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (44 – 75 MPH) is maintained for 60 seconds or more under the control of
closed loop.
- Vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) is maintained for 10 seconds or more under the control of G
closed loop.
- Under the closed loop control condition, the following state reaches 12 seconds or more in total: Vehicle
speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less with idling condition. H
- The state of driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more reaches 10 minutes or more in total.
- A lapse of 22 minutes or more after engine start.
CAUTION:
I
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle at a constant velocity.
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern J
B.
pattern B. K
Driving Pattern D
• Driving pattern D means operating vehicle as per the following.
- The state of driving at 40 km/h (25 MPH) reaches 300 seconds or more in total. L
- Idle speed lasts 30 seconds or more.
- A lapse of 600 seconds or more after engine start.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed. M
NOTE:
D. N
pattern D.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000005532402 O
DESCRIPTION
P

The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-21 or see EC-1033.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG.

Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is de-
WARNING tected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip de-
tection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
MIL Flashing Without DTC

When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-542, "Emission-
related Diagnostic Information".
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:

a malfunction. A
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. EC
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
C
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
D
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
E
G
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) H

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. I
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK J
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb.
Refer to DI-21 or EC-1033.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING K
MIL Condition
L
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) M
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test N
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- O

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second)
cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF
cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the
later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-503)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back-up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal.
Refer to "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000005532403
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-541, "Two Trip Detection
Logic".
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern

C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. A
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
EC
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
C
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
D
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
E
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUAL-
ITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. F
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
G
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

JMBIA1417GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with-
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. A
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C> EC
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm C
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal D
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: E
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) F
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. G
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR H
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

JMBIA1418GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without A
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.) EC
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared. C
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETE-
RIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
D
<Driving Pattern A>
JMBIA1920GB
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. J
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: K
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. L
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000005532404
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. A
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Refer to EC-578, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
EC
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) C
PBIA8513J
D
Without CONSULT-III
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about E
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-578, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) F

CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4. H
1. Stop engine. I
2. Perform EC-580, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
>> GO TO 5. J
Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
K
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING L
Refer to EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No M
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4. N
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
O
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-578, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check".
P
CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-III


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-793.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-799.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
>> GO TO 4.
- Timing indicator (1)
M/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

A/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
CVT: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB3263E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 13.
Refer to EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. A
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
EC
With CONSULT-III
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-578, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check". C

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) D
Without CONSULT-III E
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) F

CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17. H
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
I
- Timing indicator (1)
J
CVT: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19 L
NG >> GO TO 16. PBIB3263E

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-157, "Removal and Installation". M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. N
2. GO TO 4.
17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-793.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. P
Refer to EC-799.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
this is a rare case.)
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-580, "VIN Registration".
2. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check INFOID:0000000005532405
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
Check idle speed in Service $01 with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire (1) as shown.
• : Vehicle front
PBIB3320E

• Timing indicator (1)
PBIB3263E
Method B
1. Remove No. 4 ignition coil (1).

• : Vehicle front
A
EC
PBIB3321E
D
2. Connect No. 4 ignition coil (1) and No. 4 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire (A) as shown, and
attach timing light clamp (B) to this wire.
• : Vehicle front E
PBIB3322E
H
K
PBIB3334E

• Timing indicator (1) L
PBIB3263E
O
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000005532406
P
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.
2. Perform EC-580, "VIN Registration".
4. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".

5. Perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
VIN Registration INFOID:0000000005532407
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-43, "Model Variation".
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000005532408
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning INFOID:0000000005532409
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000005532410
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T): ON
Selector lever (A/T and CVT): P or N

• Electric load switch: OFF
[Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger] A
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
EC
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Models with CONSULT-III (A/T and CVT models)
• Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” or “CVT” system indicates less C
than 0.9 V.
- Models without CONSULT-III (A/T and CVT models) and M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. D
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
E
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. G
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to
the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. H
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
Refer to EC-574, "Basic Inspection". I
Item Specification
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) J
Idle speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) K
Ignition timing A/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
L
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has M
a malfunction.
2. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". N
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
O
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. P
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.

11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. Refer to EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
Item Specification
Idle speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing A/T: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-624.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
- Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000005532411
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III

1. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) located in IPDM E/R (2).
• : Vehicle front A
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. EC
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
C
PBIB2958E
D
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: E
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because C11 models do not have fuel return system.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other F
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C, G
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in
manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". H
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check B and fuel tube
adapter (KV10118400) D, then connect fuel pressure gauge A.
• : To quick connector I
• : To fuel tube (engine side)
• C: Clamp
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine J
NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moder-
ately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with dam- K
age or cracks on it. PBIB2982E
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-152, "Removal and Installation". L
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check (1) to fuel tube
(engine side) with clamp (2) as shown in the figure. M
• No.2 spool (5)
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
N
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
(3) and No.1 spool (4).
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube. O
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710
or 16439 40U00).
PBIB2983E
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
P
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)

• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.

5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector.
• A: Fuel pressure gauge
• B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
6. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
8. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
9. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. BBIA0695E
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.

10. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
11. Check the following.
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
13. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000005532412
INTRODUCTION EC
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen- C
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
D
E
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit- F

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- G
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should J
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on "WORK FLOW".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a drivability complaint. The customer K
can supply good information about such incidents, especially inter-
mittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what
conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on
"Worksheet Sample" should be used. L
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot drivability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle. M
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
JSBIA0067GB
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.

*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
Detailed Flow
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment
when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. A
2. Ask if the customer requests I/M examination.
Malfunction information, obtained>>GO TO 2. EC

No malfunction information, but a request for I/M examination>>GO TO 13.
2.CHECK DTC
C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".) D
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.

Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident. J
>> GO TO 6. K

Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then make sure that DTC is L
detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-590, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
M
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during N
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE. O
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to EC-624, "Description". P
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE

With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, and “A/F ALPHA-
B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-III “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-624, "Inspec-
tion Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-624, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnosis Procedure. For details, refer to GI-25, "How to Perform
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-605, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value", EC-620, "CONSULT-III Refer-
ence Value in Data Monitor Mode".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function
Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been completely repaired.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> No request for I/M examination from the customer: Before returning the vehicle to the customer,
always erase unnecessary DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). Refer to EC-
542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
NO-2 >> I/M examination, requested from the customer: GO TO 13.
13.PREPARE FOR I/M EXAMINATION
1. Set SRT codes. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
2. Erase permanent DTCs. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
>> INSPECTION END A
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description EC
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
C
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet as shown in the following "Worksheet D
Sample" in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples: E
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
F
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005532413
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

1 • U0101 U0140 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0116 P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0128 Thermostat function
• P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0705 Transmission range switch
• P0850 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 • P0031 P0032 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P014C P014D P015A P015B P2A00 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• P0137 P0138 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
• P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
• P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
• P2118 Throttle control motor
3 • P0011 Intake valve timing control
• P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
• P0300 - P0304 Misfire
• P0420 Three way catalyst function
• P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
• P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
• P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
• P0710 P0715 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0746 P0750 P0755 P0776 P0778
P0840 P0845 P1705 P1740 P1760 P1777 P1778 A/T or CVT related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
• P1148 Closed loop control
• P1211 TCS control unit
• P1212 TCS communication line
• P1421 Cold start control
• P1564 ASCD steering switch
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
• P1715 Input speed sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
Fail-Safe Chart INFOID:0000000005532414
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condi- EC
P0118 sensor circuit tion.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided C
Condition
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
D
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting.
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above E
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
F
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 condition. G
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. H
P2100 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a I
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
J
P2119 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. K
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less. L
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
M
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T, CVT), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed
will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. N
P2128 condition.
O
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
P
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000005532415
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-1014
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-582
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-1009
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-525
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-538
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-574
EC-952,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-963
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-574
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1019
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-633
EC-664,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-672
1 EC-683,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-686,
EC-696
3 EC-704,
EC-710,
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-716,
EC-750,
EC-989
EC-691,
EC-778,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-919,
EC-921,
2 2 EC-977
EC-896,
EC-965,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-970,
EC-982
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-789
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-793

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-799 F
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-887
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-893
G
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-659
cuit
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-901 H
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-1028
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-1007
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 MTC-23 I
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-10
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. J
(continued on next table)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-5
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-135
Air cleaner EM-135
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-135
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-137
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-137
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-22
Starter circuit 3 SC-16
Signal plate 6 1 EM-196
Park/neutral position (PNP)
MT-57,
switch (M/T)
4 AT-94,
Transmission range switch (A/T
CVT-70
or CVT)
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-182
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-196
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Valve Timing chain EM-157 F
mecha-
Camshaft EM-166
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-157
G
Intake valve
3 EM-185
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ H
Gasket EM-140,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-11
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-143, I
tion filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-20
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-17
J
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-41
Thermostat 5 CO-46
Water control valve CO-48 K
Water pump CO-44
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-35
Cooling fan CO-43
L
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5

CO-36
ed coolant
M
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-
1 1 BL-257
NATS)
N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005532416
PBIB3261E
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built-in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor)
solenoid valve

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
BBIA0724E
: Vehicle front M
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor) N
4. PCV valve 5. Cooling fan motor 6. Resistor
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor
O

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0725E
: Vehicle front
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Knock sensor 3. IPDM E/R
valve
4. Fuel pump fuse (15 A) 5. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 6. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
7. Fuel pressure regulator 8. Fuel level sensor 9. Fuel tank temperature sensor
10. Ignition coil 11. Fuel injector
(with power transistor) and spark plug

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
BBIA0727E
: Vehicle front M
1. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
4. EVAP service port 5. ECM harness connector 6. ECM N
7. Stop lamp switch 8. Accelerator pedal position sensor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0726E
: Vehicle front
4. Three way catalyst (Under floor) 5. Muffler 6. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness
connector
connector

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
L
BBIA0728E
1. Stop lamp switch 2. ASCD brake switch 3. ASCD clutch switch M

4. Clutch pedal 5. ASCD steering switch 6. MAIN switch
7. CANCEL switch 8. SET/COAST switch 9. RESUME/ACCELERATOR switch
10. EVAP control system pressure sen- 11. EVAP canister 12. EVAP canister vent control valve N
sor

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000005532417
PBIB3330E
: Vehicle front : From EVAP canister

1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP service port
solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
Refer to EC-516, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000005532418
EC
ABBWA0359GB
P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
AWBWA0033GB

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000005532419
EC
PBIA9221J
D
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000005532420
E
PREPARATION
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• : Vehicle front
F
PBIB2959E
I
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: J
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
K
Termi- Wire
Item Condition Data (DC Voltage)
nal No. color
Approximately 3.2 V L

1 L
(Open) • Shift lever: D (A/T, CVT), 1st (M/T)
M
PBIA8150J N
supply (11 - 14 V)
Approximately 2.9 - 8.8 V

O
[Engine is running]
3 G A/F sensor 1 heater • Idle speed P
(More than 140 seconds after starting en-
gine)
PBIA8148J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color
Approximately 1.8 V

• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T, CVT), 1st (M/T)
PBIA8149J
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
5 G
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running] (11 - 14 V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed

9 P PBIB0050E
control solenoid valve
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
11 B • Idle speed
3-5V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle.
PBIA8164J
13 L Tachometer signal
3-5V
[Engine is running]
PBIA8165J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V EC
0 - 0.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition C
• Idle speed
NOTE:
D
at idle.
17 R Ignition signal No. 1

0.2 - 0.5 V E
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition F
PBIA9266J G
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0 V
ON H
23 GR Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V) I
switch ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running] J
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm K
at idle.
29 Y Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB0529E
L
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
M
N
PBIA4943J
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE O

valve (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V P
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5 V
• Idle speed
38 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with en-
sensor
gine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor)
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
sure sensor
Fuel tank temperature sen-
43 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature
44 B (Engine coolant temperature • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sensor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
46 V [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
48 BR (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
sor) • Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color A
[Engine is running]
quickly after the following conditions are EC
met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0 V
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 C
51 O (EVAP control system pres- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V D
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor) E
• Idle speed
55 O (Intake air temperature sen- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
F
sor) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground G
• Idle speed
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] H
• Idle speed
NOTE:
I
at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB2998E

61 W
(POS)
J
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] K
L
PBIB2999E

M
(POS)] • Idle speed
(PHASE)] • Idle speed N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle.
Camshaft position sensor PBIB2986E

65 G
(PHASE)
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
PBIB2987E
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE

• Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), Neutral (M/T) (11 - 14 V)
69 L PNP signal
Approximately 0 V
• Except above
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V
Intake valve timing control
73 P [Engine is running]
solenoid valve
• When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quick-
ly
PBIA4937J
Sensor power supply

sensor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
83 P CAN communication line — —
84 L CAN communication line — —
88 LG DATA link connector — —
(11 - 14 V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Termi- Wire
nal No. color A
Approximately 4 V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON] EC
Approximately 0 V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
94 R ASCD steering switch Approximately 1 V
• CANCEL switch: Pressed C
Approximately 3 V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] D
Approximately 2 V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
95 B • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V E
(ASCD steering switch)
• Idle speed
Approximately 0 V
99 R Stop lamp switch F
G
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T, CVT)
Approximately 0 V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de-
pressed (M/T)
100 G ASCD brake switch H
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T, CVT) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully re- (11 - 14 V)
leased (M/T)
I
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
J
103 GR K
Sensor ground [Engine is running] L
104 Y (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
BATTERY VOLTAGE M
(11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
106 P (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sensor 1)
N
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
O
110 G
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON] P
111 R (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000005532421
FUNCTION

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self Diagnostic Result
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT Confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
Work item Condition Usage

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW “ON”
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
III WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BAT-
TERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work item Condition Usage
A
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
VIN REGISTRATION • IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM
EC
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

C
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data D
Freeze frame data item* Description

DIAG TROUBLE CODE • The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. E
[PXXXX] (Refer to EC-503)
• “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction F
FUEL SYS-B1
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
G
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F] H
• “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
I
• “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
J
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
K
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL [ms] • The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L
[°C] or [°F]
FUEL SYS-B2
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] M
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] • These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
N
COMBUST CONDITION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE O
Monitored Item
P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item [Unit] Description Remarks

• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the signals of the drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED
crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sen- • If the signal is interrupted while the engine is
[rpm]
sor (PHASE). running, an abnormal value may be indicat-
ed.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value
MAS A/F SE-B1 is indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed.
[V] • When engine is running, specification range
is indicated in "SPEC".
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width
B/FUEL SCHDL • When engine is running, specification range
programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correc-
[ms] is indicated in "SPEC".
tion.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain value
is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction fac- • This data also includes the data for the air/
[%] tor per cycle is indicated. fuel ratio learning control.
• When engine is running, specification range
is indicated in "SPEC".
• When the engine coolant temperature sen-
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal
COOLAN TEMP/S sor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters
voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is dis-
[°C] or [°F] fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temper-
played.
ature determined by the ECM is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sen-
[V] sor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is dis-
[V] played.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) • When the engine is stopped, a certain value
is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst
is relatively large.
VHCL SPEED SE • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal is
[km/h] or [mph] displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
• The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
[V]
ACCEL SEN 1
[V] • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is dis-
internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal
ACCEL SEN 2 played.
voltage signal.
[V]
TP SEN 1-B1
[V] • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by ECM in-
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ternally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal
TP SEN 2-B1 voltage signal.
[V]
FUEL T/TMP SE • The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the
[°C] or [°F] fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE • The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage
[°C] or [°F] of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES • The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor
[V] is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE
• The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.
[V]
START SIGNAL • Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM • After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed
[ON/OFF] according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. regardless of the starter signal.
CLSD THL POS • Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM ac-
[ON/OFF] cording to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
AIR COND SIG • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as
[ON/OFF] determined by the air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position
[ON/OFF] (PNP) signal. EC
PW/ST SIGNAL • [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (deter-
[ON/OFF] mined by the signal sent from EPS control unit) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. C
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting
LOAD SIGNAL
switch is in 2nd position.
[ON/OFF]
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch D
are OFF.
IGNITION SW
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch.
[ON/OFF]
E
HEATER FAN SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch sig-
[ON/OFF] nal.
BRAKE SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch sig-
[ON/OFF] nal.
F
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated • When the engine is stopped, a certain com-
[msec] by ECM according to the input signals. puted value is indicated.
G
IGN TIMING • Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to • When the engine is stopped, a certain value
[BTDC] the input signals. is indicated.
CAL/LD VALUE • “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current air-
[%] flow divided by peak airflow. H
MASS AIRFLOW • Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to
[g·m/s] the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
I
PURG VOL C/V valve control value computed by the ECM according to the in-
[%] put signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value increases. J
INT/V TIM(B1)
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.
[°CA]
• The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid K
INT/V SOL(B1) valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is in-
[%] dicated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases
L
AIR COND RLY • The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by
[ON/OFF] ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY • Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by
[ON/OFF] ECM according to the input signals. M
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve
(determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indi-
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
cated. N
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
THRTL RELAY • Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition de-
O
[ON/OFF] termined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (determined by
ECM according to the input signals).
COOLING FAN P
HI: High speed operation
[HI/LOW/OFF]
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2
[ON/OFF] heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.
I/P PULLY SPD • Indicates the engine speed computed from the input speed
[rpm] sensor signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
VEHICLE SPEED • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal
[km/h] or [MPH] sent from TCM is displayed.
• Display the condition of idle air volume learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet.
[YET/CMPLT] CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already been per-
formed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
• Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
• Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by
A/F S1 HTR(B1) ECM according to the input signals.
[%] • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
AC PRESS SEN • The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is dis-
[V] played.
VHCL SPEED SE • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal
[km/h] or [MPH] sent from TCM is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
• The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [MPH]
MAIN SW
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch signal.
[ON/OFF]
CANCEL SW
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
[ON/OFF]
RESUME/ACC SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCELERATE
[ON/OFF] switch signal.
SET SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] SET/COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1 • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch sig-
[ON/OFF] nal.
BRAKE SW2
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal.
[ON/OFF]
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
VHCL SPD CUT NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared
with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
LO SPEED CUT NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared
with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the in- • For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed
[ON/OFF] put signal from the TCM.
AT OD CANCEL • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent • For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed
[ON/OFF] from the TCM.
CRUISE LAMP • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined
[ON/OFF] by the ECM according to the input signals.
SET LAMP • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the
[ON/OFF] ECM according to the input signals.
• Indicates the correction factor stored in ECM. The factor is
calculated from the difference between the target air/fuel ratio
A/F ADJ-B1
stored in ECM and the air/fuel ratio calculated from air fuel ra-
tio (A/F) sensor 1 signal.
• Indicates DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (delayed response) con-
HO2 S2 DIAG1 (B1) dition.
[INCMP/CMPLT] INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
CMPLT: Self-diagnosis is complete.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
• Indicates DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) condi-
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1) tion.
[INCMP/CMPLT] INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
CMPLT: Self-diagnosis is complete. EC
A/F SEN1 • Indicates DTC P015A or P015B self-diagnosis condition.
DIAG1(B1) INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
C
A/F SEN1 • Indicates DTC P014C or P014D self-diagnosis condition.
DIAG2(B1) INCMP: Self-diagnosis is incomplete.
D
• Indicates DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B self-diagno-
A/F SEN1 sis condition.
DIAG3(B1) ABSNT: The vehicle condition is not within the diagnosis
[ABSNT/PRSNT] range. E
PRSNT: The vehicle condition is within the diagnosis range.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. F
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item G
Test item Condition Judgment Check item (Remedy)

• Engine: Return to the original H
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Return to the original I
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
J
CONSULT-III.
engine.
• Compression K
• A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- • Fuel injector
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE • Power transistor
Neutral (M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
• Ignition coil L
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan relay
and “OFF” with CONSULT-III. • Cooling fan motor M
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor N
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors O
• Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-III and lis-
ten to operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run en- P
gine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to
• EVAP canister purge volume con-
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent.
trol solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
FUEL/T TEMP
• Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
SEN

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Test item Condition Judgment Check item (Remedy)
(Engine stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
TROL/V sound. • EVAP canister vent control valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
listen to operating sound.
V/T ASSIGN AN- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Intake valve timing control sole-
GLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
PERMANENT DTC STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
NOTE:
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
PERMANENT DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to complete the driving pattern that is reguired for erasing
permanent DTC.
NOTE:
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference

PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-810
P0442 EC-815
EVAPORATIVE SYS- EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
P0455 EC-866
TEM
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-873
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-822
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-704
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 — —
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-741
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-731
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-722
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to C11 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000005532422
DESCRIPTION

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978/ISO
15031-4 has 8 different functions explained below. A
ISO 15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
EC
SEF139P
D
FUNCTION

E
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-612, "CONSULT-III Function (EN- F
GINE)".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM. G
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) H
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) I
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. J
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
K
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can
be closed. In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature L
Service $08 — • Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF
• Low fuel temperature M
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. N
Service $0A* PERMANENT DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to permanent DTCs which were stored by ECM.
NOTE:
O
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. Connect GST to data link connector (1), which is located under
LH dash panel.
BBIA0734E

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005532423
Remarks:
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
Monitor item Condition Specification
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-624.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-624.
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-624.
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1)
are met 1.0 V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and LEAN ←→ RICH EC
at idle for 1 minute under no load
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
C
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8 V D
ACCEL SEN 2*
E
EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8 V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
F
TP SEN 2-B1* • Shift lever: D (A/T, CVT),
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
1st (M/T)
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
G
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF H
engine ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), I
ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
J
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON K
ON
and/or Lighting switch: 2nd
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF
L
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
Heater fan: Operating ON
HEATER FAN SW • Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF M
N
INJ PULSE-B1 • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
Neutral (M/T) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec O
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 8° - 18° BTDC
P
IGN TIMING • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
Neutral (M/T) 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MASS AIRFLOW • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle
• Air conditioner switch: OFF (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), even slightly, after engine starting)
Neutral (M/T)
• No load 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA

INT/V TIM (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Neutral (M/T) Approx. 0° - 40°CA
quickly
• No load
INT/V SOL (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Neutral (M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
• Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON OFF
Engine coolant temperature: 97°C
OFF
(207°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HIGH
(212°F) or more
• Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
tachometer indication
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. speedometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine.)
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates)
• Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT- Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
III value. speedometer indication
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON EC
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed C
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON D
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T,
CVT) E
ON
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully
released (M/T)
BRAKE SW1 • Ignition switch: ON
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed F
(A/T, CVT)
OFF
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal:
Slightly depressed (M/T)
G
BRAKE SW2 • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → H
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ACSD: Operating ON
• Vehicle speed: Between 40 km/h
SET LAMP
(25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
I
ASCD: Not operating OFF
MPH)
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (delayed response) is incomplete. INCMP
HO2 S2 DIAG1 (B1) J
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (delayed response) is complete. CMPLT
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) is incomplete. INCMP
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) is complete. CMPLT K
DTC P015A and P015B self-diagnosis is incomplete. INCMP
A/F SEN1 DIAG1 (B1)
DTC P015A and P015B self-diagnosis is complete. CMPLT
DTC P014C and P014D self-diagnosis is incomplete. INCMP
L
A/F SEN1 DIAG2 (B1)
DTC P014C and P014D self-diagnosis is complete. CMPLT
The vehicle condition is not within the diagnosis range of DTC P014C, P014D,
ABSNT M
P015A or P015B.
A/F SEN1 DIAG3 (B1)
The vehicle condition is within the diagnosis range of DTC P014C, P014D,
PRSNT
P015A or P015B.
N
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in
“SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000005532425
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
- A/T and CVT models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVT) fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000005532426
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-624, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OVERALL SEQUENCE

EC
PBIB2318E

PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-624, "Testing Condition".
the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. EC
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
C
SP value.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
SP value.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. G
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. H
3. Start engine.
the SP value. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil. Refer to LU-18, "Changing Engine Oil". K
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too L
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
M
>> INSPECTION END
N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.

- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1014.)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".)

>> GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
- Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-1019.)
- Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1009.)
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-181, "On-Vehicle Service".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-704, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P014C, P014D, P015A, P015B, refer to EC-751, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P2A00, refer to EC-989, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15. A
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. EC
>> GO TO 16.
C
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within D
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
F
SP value.
OK or NG
G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
H
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high I
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc. J
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction K
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. L

M
• Improper specification of intake air system N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. O
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the P
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-664.
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs.
>> GO TO 29.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
SP value.
OK or NG
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap A
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
EC
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. C
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” D
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. E
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart". F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value. G
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart". H

Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent
Incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation

2 The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than 0 or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
1.INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs.
Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-22, "How to Check Terminal", “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

A
EC
P
BBWA2625E
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL COLOR
NO.
11 B • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF
(11 - 14 V)
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G [Ignition switch: ON]
ECM (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground with CON-
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9561J

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body.

EC
BBIA0698E
D
: Vehicle front
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16
4. Body ground E15 E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 10, 11, 108 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground K

L
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
N
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-1019. O
NG >> GO TO 8.
P
PBIB2658E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 105 and ground with
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop
approximately 0 V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB3037E
11.
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIA9562J
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 105 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

13.CHECK 20 A FUSE A
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace 20 A fuse.
14.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS C
D
BBIA0698E G
: Vehicle front
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16 H
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
15.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II J
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 10, 11, 108 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K
3. Also check harness for short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16. M
• Harness connectors F8, E8 N
O
Refer to EC-632. P
OK or NG

Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000005532432
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution".
PBIB1870E

DTC U0101 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532434
D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
E
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
• CAN communication line between TCM
U0101 Lost communication and ECM F
communication signal of OBD (emission-related
0101 with TCM • CAN communication line is open or short-
diagnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or more.
ed.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532435

H
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-640, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I

BBWA2626E
Go to LAN-26, "CAN System Specification Chart".

A
D
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
• CAN communication line between BCM
U0140 Lost communication and ECM F
communication signal of OBD (emission-related
0140 with BCM • CAN communication line is open or short-
diagnosis) with BCM for 2 seconds or more.
ed.
G

H
2. Check DTC.
I

BBWA2626E

A
D
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN • Harness or connectors
U1001 CAN communication
communication signal other than OBD (emission- (CAN communication line is open or F
1001 line
related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. shorted.)

G

2. Check 1st trip DTC. H
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-644, "Diagnosis Procedure".

BBWA2626E

DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed and piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Intake valve Intake valve timing control
timing control solenoid valve
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) D
Vehicle speed*
Combination meter
E
J
PBIB3333E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine K
coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. L
Specification data are reference values. M

• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA N
INT/V TIM (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Neutral (M/T) Approx. 0° - 40°CA
quickly
• No load O
INT/V SOL (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm P
Neutral (M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load

P0011 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075.
See EC-659.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.87 msec
P or N position (A/T, CVT)
Shift lever
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.

Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. A
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP EC
1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi- C
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> Go to LU-17, "Inspection".
PBIA8559J
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) L
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft N
O
PBIA9557J
6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION P

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-157, "Removal and Installation".
No >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-166, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.
Refer to EC-632.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-794, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-800, "Wiring Diagram"
for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0574E

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
PBIB2388E


DTC P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
A
ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function C
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heat-
heater control er
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air D
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
E
Specification data are reference values.

F
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine.) G
H
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) • Harness or connectors I
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
P0031 sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is
sensor 1 heater
0031 [An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.]
control circuit low
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.] • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
J
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
P0032 sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is
sensor 1 heater
0032 [An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.]
control circuit high
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.] • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater K
L
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5 V and 16 V at
idle.
1. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. N
O

AABWA0320GB
CAUTION:

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. A
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
[Engine is running] C
3 G A/F sensor 1 heater • Idle speed
(More than 140 seconds after starting
engine) D
PBIA8148J
[Engine is running] Approximately 1.8 V E

F

G
I
BBIA0698E
L
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. N
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector (1). O
- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (2)
P
BBIA0699E

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 4 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E


4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
A
Terminal No. Resistance
3 and 4 1.8 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. C

CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such D
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-
43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. E
G
PBIB3309E
H
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER
I

DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 OFF
• Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1

• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load.
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen
P0037 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater
0037 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
control circuit low
Heated oxygen
P0038 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater
0038 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
control circuit high
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5 V and 16 V at
idle.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. A
EC
BBWA2628E

CAUTION:
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
5 G
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quick-
ly after the following conditions are met.
50 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 - Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0 V
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector (2).

- : Vehicle front EC
- Heated oxygen sensor 2 (1)
BBIA0700E
E
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
MBIB0186E

I
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
J
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 5 and HO2S2 terminal 3. L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. N
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
P
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18
or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB3310E
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2


DTC P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF EC

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow. C
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve D
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E E
Specification data are reference values. F

• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2% G
INT/V SOL (B1) • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), Neu- When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
tral (M/T) Approx. 0% - 90%
quickly
• No load H
• Harness or connectors J
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
P0075 Intake valve timing control (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid
0075 solenoid valve circuit circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
K
NOTE: L
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
M
N

ABBWA0360GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition switch C
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition D
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V) E
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V
Intake valve timing control F
73 P
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
• When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly
G
PBIA4937J

BATTERY VOLTAGE H
(11 - 14 V)
I
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) har-
ness connector. K
PBIB3323E
N
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. P
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF212S
2.DETECT MALFUNCTION PART


• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R

3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0574E

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
PBIB2388E

A
EC

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
the heat loss.
PBIA9559J

MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-624.
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
CAL/LD VALUE Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
MASS AIRFLOW Neutral (M/T)
• No load
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
A) • Mass air flow sensor
under light load driving condition.
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
P0101 Mass air flow sensor cir-
0101 cuit range/performance • Harness or connectors
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM un- • Intake air leaks
B)
der heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE: A
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
C
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
D
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. E
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. F
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
If OK, go to following step.
PBIB3457E L

M
N
Shift lever Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help O
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000005532483

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST

3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

EC
BBWA2632E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G [Ignition switch: ON]
ECM (11 - 14 V)
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.
Check the following for connections.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
BBIA0698E

: Vehicle front A
4. Body ground E15
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
BBIA0701E
G
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
NG >> GO TO 5.
J
PBIB1168E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. N
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 52.
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short or short to power in harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Perform EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-III
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4
0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.5 - 1.8
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4*
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Improper specification of intake air system parts

b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step. A
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. EC
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Without CONSULT-III C
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 45 (Mass air flow sensor D
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage (V) E

0.9 - 1.2 F
1.5 - 1.8
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4* PBIA9564J G
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. H
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element I
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
If OK, go to next step. J
K
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005532487 L

Refer to EM-135, "Removal and Installation". M

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
the heat loss.
PBIA9559J

MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-624.
CAL/LD VALUE Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
MASS AIRFLOW Neutral (M/T)
• No load
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
Trouble diagnosis
name
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is open or short-
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent
ed.)
0102 circuit low input to ECM.
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (Mass air flow sensor circuit is open or short-
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM. ed.)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
NOTE:

PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. A
2. Check DTC.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 EC
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-675, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Check DTC.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-675, "Diagnosis Procedure". D

BBWA2632E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch OFF
D
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
45 G Mass air flow sensor E
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running] F
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
105 G
Power supply for
BATTERY VOLTAGE G
ECM (11 - 14 V)

H
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
I
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3. J
• Air duct K
• Vacuum hoses
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS M
Refer to EC-638, "Ground Inspection". N
BBIA0698E

: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
BBIA0701E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

Continuity should exist. A

OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
E
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END F

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR G
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. H
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. I
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

J
0.9 - 1.2
K
1.5 - 1.8
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4*
L
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. M
N
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
O
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. P
Without CONSULT-III

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 45 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage (V)

0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4* PBIA9564J
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.


DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
A
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor EC
to the ECM.
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor C
PBIA9559J E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200 G
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 46 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. I

Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Trouble diagnosis
name
K
Intake air tempera-
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit • Harness or connectors
0112 sent to ECM.
low input (Intake air temperature sensor circuit is open
or shorted.)
L
Intake air tempera-
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Intake air temperature sensor
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input
M
NOTE:
N
2. Check 1st trip DTC. O

BBWA2633E


EC
BBIA0698E
D
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature G
sensor) (1) harness connector.
H
BBIA0701E J
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground with CONSULT-III or tester. K
Voltage: Approximately 5 V
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. M
PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N

O
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 55.
Continuity should exist. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P


DTC P0116 ECT SENSOR
A

SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 38 (Engine
SEF012P
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
J
NOTE:
If DTC P0116 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117, K
P0118. Refer to EC-687, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
Engine coolant temperature signal from engine
Engine coolant tempera- • Harness or connectors
P0116 coolant temperature sensor does not fluctuate,
ture sensor circuit range/ (High or low resistance in the circuit)
0116
performance
even when some time has passed after starting
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
M
the engine with pre-warming up condition.

N
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. O
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
P
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm for more than10 minutes.
3. Move the vehicle to a cool place, then stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5.
5. Soak the vehicle until the resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5
becomes 0.5 kΩ higher than the value measured before soaking.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during soaking time.

NOTE:
Soak time changes depending on ambient air temperature. It may take several hours.

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Refer to EC-632.
Refer to EC-688, "Wiring Diagram".
>> INSPECTION END

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E

<Reference data> A
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 EC
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
C
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
D
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

Refer to CO-48, "Component".

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
SEF594K
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir- • Harness or connectors
0117 sent to ECM.
cuit low input (Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit is
Engine coolant tem- open or shorted.)
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Engine coolant temperature sensor
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided EC
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting. 80°C (176°F) C
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while D
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532511 E
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. G
2. Check DTC.
H

BBWA2634E


EC
BBIA0698E
D
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (1) har- G
ness connector.
- : Vehicle front
2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
PBIB3324E J
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-III or tester. K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. M
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N

O
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and ECT sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E
<Reference data>

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P


DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
A

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E E

• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V G
TP SEN 2-B1* • Shift lever: D (A/T, CVT), Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
1st (M/T)
H
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
I
NOTE:
J
Refer to EC-896.
K
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2) L
0123 2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 N
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
O
NOTE: P
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.
BBWA2656E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released C
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V E
• Engine stopped F
More than 0.36 V
[Engine is running]
36 Y
Sensor ground
• Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
G
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
72 V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V H
I
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. J
BBIA0698E
Vehicle front
N
:
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground E16
4. Body ground E15
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. P

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator (1) harness connec-
tor.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3325E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors.
PBIB3311E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 36.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-632.
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
D
4. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T). E
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 33 (TP sensor 1 signal),
34 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
F
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V G

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
34 Fully released Less than 4.75 V

(Throttle position sensor 2) H
Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
I
J

Refer to EM-137, "Removal and Installation". K

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

SEF594K
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or P0118.
Refer to EC-687, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0116, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0116. Refer to EC-696,
"DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed
P0125 (High resistance in the circuit)
ant temperature for after starting the engine.
0125 • Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
• Thermostat
closed loop fuel control.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).

If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. A
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because
the test result will be OK. EC
5. Check DTC.
WITH GST C
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532527 D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
F
BBIA0698E
I
: Vehicle front
J
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine N
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. O
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-46, "Removal and Installation".
P
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E
<Reference data>

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P


DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
A
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor EC
to the ECM.
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor C
PBIA9559J E
<Reference data>
F
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200 G
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 46 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION:
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. I

Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
• Harness or connectors K
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
P0127 Intake air temperature (Intake temperature sensor circuit is open
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high or shorted)
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
L
CAUTION: M
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. O
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 96°C (205°F) P
a. Turn ignition switch ON.
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 96°C (205°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.
• Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 96°C (205°F).

4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
WITH GST

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions. A
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 EC
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
C
PBIA9559J
G
SEF012P

H

I

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304. Refer to EC-783, "DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure".
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
The engine coolant temperature does not • Thermostat
P0128
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though • Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
0128
the engine has run long enough. • Engine coolant temperature sensor
WITH CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 53°C (127°F).
• Before performing the following procedure, do not fill with the fuel.
1. Turn A/C switch OFF.
2. Turn blower fan switch OFF.
5. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”.
If it is below 53°C (127°F), go to following step.
If it is above 53°C (127°F), cool down the engine to less than 53°C (127°F). Then go to next steps.
6. Start engine.
7. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 56 km/h (35 MPH)

If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 75°C (167°F) within 10 minutes, turn ignition switch
OFF because the test result will be OK.
WITH GST

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Refer to CO-46, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG A
NG >> Replace thermostat.
EC

C
D
F
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> G
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 H
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
I
SEF012P J
K
L

DTC P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this PBIB3353E
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E

Maintaining engine speed at
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 2.2 V
2,000 rpm
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other • Harness or connectors
P0130 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V. [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 cir-
0130 circuit cuit is open or shorted.]
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
B)
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V.

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

3. Check 1st trip DTC. A
CAUTION: EC
With CONSULT-III C
If the indication is constantly approx. 2.2 V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-707, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
If the indication fluctuates around 2.2 V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III. E
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
F
1,000 - 3,200 rpm (A/T, CVT)
ENG SPEED
1,350 - 3,200 rpm (M/T)
G
D position with OD OFF (A/T)
Shift lever D position (CVT) H
5th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
7. Release accelerator pedal fully. I
NOTE:
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. J
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-707, "Diagnosis Procedure".
K
PROCEDURE MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC L
might not be confirmed.
With GST M
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set shift lever to D position with OD ON (A/T), D position (CVT) or 5th position (M/T), then release the
accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). N
NOTE:
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times. O
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
P
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-707, "Diagnosis Procedure".

AABWA0319GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
engine) D
PBIA8148J

F

G
I
BBIA0698E
L
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. N
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector (1). O
BBIA0699E



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E


3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal

1 49
2 53

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 49, 53 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-632.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END

A
EC

(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E

2,000 rpm
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0131 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sen- The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor circuit is open
0131 sor 1 circuit low voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0 V. or shorted.]
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
If the indication is constantly approx. 0 V, go to EC-713, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0 V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. A
EC
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec C
NOTE:
D
4.
7. Check 1st trip DTC. E
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-713, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
F

AABWA0319GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
engine) D
PBIA8148J

F

G
I
BBIA0698E
L
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. N
BBIA0699E



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E



1 49
2 53


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-632.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
EC

(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E

2,000 rpm
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
Trouble diagnosis
name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
P0132 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor circuit is open
sor 1 circuit high volt-
0132 sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5 V. or shorted.]
age
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
If the indication is constantly approx. 5 V, go to EC-719, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5 V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. A
EC
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec C
NOTE:
D
4.
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-719, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
F

AABWA0319GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
engine) D
PBIA8148J

F

G
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
I
BBIA0698E
L
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. N
BBIA0699E



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E



1 49
2 53


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-632.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
EC

DTC P0137 HO2S2
DTC P0137 HO2S2

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
are shifted, the air/fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
ditions.
SEF327R

HO2S2 (B1) • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V
conditions are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 LEAN ←→ RICH
M/T MODELS AND A/T MODELS

gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
SEF259VA
CVT MODELS
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
JMBIA2105GB

DTC P0137 HO2S2
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
(Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit open or
P0137 Heated oxygen sensor 2 cir- The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
shorted.) EC
0137 cuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks C
NOTE: D
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
E
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
F
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). H
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. I
9. Following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. J
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-726, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. K
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
L
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed. M
WITH GST
N
4. Let engine idle 1 minute. O
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.

DTC P0137 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68 V (M/T and A/T) or 0.72V
(CVT) at least once during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD OFF (A/T), D position (CVT) or 3rd gear posi-
tion (M/T). PBIB2996E
The voltage should be above 0.68 V (M/T and A/T) or 0.72V
(CVT) at least once during this procedure.

DTC P0137 HO2S2
EC
BBWA2629E
P
CAUTION:

DTC P0137 HO2S2
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
- Keeping the engine speed between
Heated oxygen sensor 2 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
5 G
heater idle for 1 minute under no load.
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
met.
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III

DTC P0137 HO2S2
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. A
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
EC
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector, and
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- D
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information". E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? F
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-758. G
No >> GO TO 3.
- : Vehicle front
- Heated oxygen sensor 2 (1) I
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and HO2S2
terminal 1. J

K
BBIA0700E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. L
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and HO2S2 terminal 4.
Continuity should exist. N

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 or HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground.
O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG

DTC P0137 HO2S2
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (M/T AND A/T MODELS)

With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68 V and below 0.18 V at
least once during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed at step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with OD OFF (A/T) or 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.68 V and below 0.18 V at PBIB2996E

DTC P0137 HO2S2
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m A
EC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (CVT MODELS)
With CONSULT-III
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. D
CONSULT-III. E
H
JMBIA2106GB
I
CAUTION:
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor J
Without CONSULT-III
K
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. L
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load M
at least 10 times.
N
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check O
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position.
least once during this procedure. PBIB2996E P
CAUTION:

DTC P0137 HO2S2


DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC P0138 HO2S2
A

ditions. D
SEF327R E

HO2S2 (B1) • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V G
conditions are met.
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load H
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ I
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
J
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of rear heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM
monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut. K
PBIB2266E
MALFUNCTION B N
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
O
PBIB2376E

DTC P0138 HO2S2
An excessively high voltage from the (Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit is open
A)
sensor is sent to ECM. or shorted.)
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
0138 circuit high voltage (Heated oxygen sensor circuit is open or
The minimum voltage from the sensor shorted.)
B)
is not reached to the specified voltage. • Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR ” mode with CONSULT-III
9. Following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

trip DTC might not be confirmed.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. A
EC
4. Let engine idle 1 minute.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load C
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this
procedure. D
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or E
position with OD OFF (A/T), D position (CVT) or 3rd gear posi-
tion (M/T). PBIB2996E F
The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this
procedure.
G

DTC P0138 HO2S2
BBWA2629E
CAUTION:

DTC P0138 HO2S2
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at D
5 G
PBIA8148J
[Ignition switch: ON] E

F
[Engine is running]
met. G
idle for 1 minute under no load. H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed I

J

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K
2. Loosen and retighten engine screw on the body.
Refer to EC-638, "Ground Inspection". L
O
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
P
1. body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0138 HO2S2

- : Vehicle front
terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG BBIA0700E
OK >> GO TO 3.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check connectors for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


DTC P0138 HO2S2
EC
BBIA0698E
D
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-III G
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. H
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
I
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- K
nector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed.
Diagnostic Information". L
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? M
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-764. N
No >> GO TO 3.
O

DTC P0138 HO2S2
- : Vehicle front

OK or NG BBIA0700E
OK >> GO TO 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
A
EC
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. D
CAUTION:
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. E
F
Without CONSULT-III
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. H
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) I
essary. J
with OD OFF (A/T) or 3rd gear position (M/T). K
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. L
CAUTION:
M
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (CVT MODELS) N
With CONSULT-III
O
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. P
CONSULT-III.

DTC P0138 HO2S2
JMBIA2106GB
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
essary.
least once during this procedure. PBIB2996E

CAUTION:


DTC P0139 HO2S2
DTC P0139 HO2S2
A

ditions. D
SEF327R E

HO2S2 (B1) • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0 V G
conditions are met.
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load H
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (delayed response) is incomplete. INCMP
HO2 S2 DIAG1 (B1)
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (delayed response) is complete. CMPLT
I
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) is incomplete. INCMP
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)
DTC P0139 self-diagnosis (slow response) is complete. CMPLT
J

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy- K
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
L
voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions such
as fuel cut.
SEF302U
O
Heated oxygen sensor 2 The switching time between rich and lean of a
P0139 • Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1) circuit slow re- heated oxygen sensor 2 signal delays more
0139 • Fuel system P
sponse than the specified time computed by ECM.
• EVAP system
• Intake air system
1.INSPECTION START

DTC P0139 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
2.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
9. Drive the vehicle in a proper at 60 km/h (38MPH) and maintain the speed.
CAUTION:
10. Release the accelerator pedal fully at least 5 seconds.
CAUTION:
• Enable engine brake.
• Always drive carefully.
• Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
11. Repeat step 9 and 10 at least 8 times.
12. Check the following item of “DATA MONITOR”.
DTC Data monitor item Status

HO2 S2 DIAG1 (B1)
P0139 CMPLT
HO2 S2 DIAG2 (B1)
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1: “CMPLT” is not displayed on DIAG 1>>Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.
NO-2: “CMPLT” is not displayed on DIAG 2>>GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC WORK SUPPORT
2. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
NOTE:
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.

DTC P0139 HO2S2
>> GO TO 3.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS A
With CONSULT-III
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. EC
Is DTC “P0139” detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-745, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END C
7.PERFORM OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-743, "Overall Function Check".
NOTE: D
Use overall function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
NO >> Proceed to EC-745, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
trip DTC might not be confirmed. G
WITH GST
3. Start engine and keep the engine between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. I
at least 10 times.
J
A change of voltage should be more than 0.8 V for 1 second
essary. K
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
position with OD OFF (A/T), D position (CVT) or 3rd gear posi- L
tion (M/T).
PBIB2996E
A change of voltage should be more than 0.8 V for 1 second
8. If NG, go to EC-745, "Diagnosis Procedure". M

DTC P0139 HO2S2
BBWA2629E
CAUTION:

DTC P0139 HO2S2
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at D
5 G
PBIA8148J
[Ignition switch: ON] E

F
[Engine is running]
met. G
idle for 1 minute under no load. H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed I

J

L
BBIA0698E
O
: Vehicle front
P
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

DTC P0139 HO2S2
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Without CONSULT-III
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
Diagnostic Information".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-758 or EC-764.
No >> GO TO 3.
- : Vehicle front
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 1 and ECM

OK or NG BBIA0700E
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 50.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG

DTC P0139 HO2S2
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. A
Refer to EC-632.
EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005532595 C

D
With CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with F
CONSULT-III.
G
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. J
CAUTION:
K
L
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. M
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. N
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) O
P
essary.
with OD OFF (A/T) or 3rd gear position (M/T).

DTC P0139 HO2S2
CAUTION:
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (CVT MODELS)
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III.
JMBIA2106GB
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
at least 10 times.
essary.
least once during this procedure. PBIB2996E

CAUTION:

DTC P0139 HO2S2
A
EC

DTC P014C, P014D, P015A, P015B, A/F SENSOR 1
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E

2,000 rpm
DTC P015A and P015B self-diagnosis is incomplete. INCMP
A/F SEN1 DIAG1 (B1)
DTC P015A and P015B self-diagnosis is complete. CMPLT
DTC P014C and P014D self-diagnosis is incomplete. INCMP
A/F SEN1 DIAG2 (B1)
DTC P014C and P014D self-diagnosis is complete. CMPLT
The vehicle condition is not within the diagnosis range of DTC
ABSNT
P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B.
A/F SEN1 DIAG3 (B1)
The vehicle condition is within the diagnosis range of DTC P014C,
PRSNT
P014D, P015A or P015B.
To judge malfunctions, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/
F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control con-
stant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F
signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
P014C Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 1) circuit slow re- • Harness or connectors
P014D sponse • The response time of a A/F sensor 1 signal de-
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
lays more than the specified time computed by
P015A Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shorted.)
ECM.
(bank 1) circuit delayed re- • A/F sensor 1
P015B sponse

A
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test. EC
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Do you have CONSULT-III? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-1 E
With CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. G
9. Check the items status of “DATA MONITOR” as follows. H
NOTE:
If “PRSNT” changed to “ABSNT”, refer to EC-705, "Overall Function Check".
I
Data monitor item Status
A/F SEN1 DIAG3 (B1) PRSNT
J
Is “PRSNT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
K
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-2
With CONSULT-III
Perform DTC confirmation procedure-1 again. L
Is “PRSNT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Refer to EC-705, "Overall Function Check". M
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-2
1. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle. N
2. Check the items status of “DATA MONITOR” as follows.
NOTE:
If “CMPLT” changed to “INCMP”, refer to EC-705, "Overall Function Check".
O
Data monitor item Status
A/F SEN1 DIAG1 (B1)
CMPLT P
A/F SEN1 DIAG2 (B1)
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Refer to EC-705, "Overall Function Check".
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-III
Check the “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
6.CHECK AIR-FUEL RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
With GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• PCV valve


EC
AABWA0319GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J


BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-140, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.

A
EC
PBIB1216E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA G
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. H
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? I
Without CONSULT-III
nector. K
Diagnostic Information". L
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to
M
start engine?
BBIA0701E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-758 or EC-764.
N
No >> GO TO 6.

2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector (1).
- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (2)
BBIA0699E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3308E



1 49
2 53


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.

10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. EC
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. D
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
Perform EC-632, "Description". E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair or replace. F
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. G
CAUTION:
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread H
>> INSPECTION END I
J
K

DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.),
the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection
logic).

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
Trouble diagnosis
name
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
P0171 Fuel injection system • Exhaust gas leaks
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
0171 too lean • Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
• Lack of fuel
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
5. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
Perform the following procedure is advised.
a. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
b. If engine starts, go to EC-761, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
6. Keep engine at idle for at least 5 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-761,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine.
c. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.

VHCL SPEED SE 50 – 120 km/h (31 – 75 MPH) A

CAUTION:
EC
d. Check 1st trip DTC.
e. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-761, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST C
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector. D
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness
E
connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
F
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a mal-
function. G
BBIA0701E
NOTE: H
b. If engine starts, go to EC-761, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
10. Check 1st trip DTC. J
NOTE: K
b. Start engine. L
M
VHCL SPEED SE 50 – 120 km/h (31 – 75 MPH)
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. N
O

AABWA0321GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
C
[Engine is running]
3 G A/F sensor 1 heater
• Idle speed
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine) D
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE E
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed F
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
25 V Fuel injector No. 4 G

31 L Fuel injector No. 1 H
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
I
PBIA4943J J
49 W A/F sensor 1 • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm fuel ratio. K
L
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK M

N
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector (1).
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

1 49
2 53
BBIA0699E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1014.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
• Fuel lines (Refer to FL-5.)
>> Repair or replace.

With CONSULT-III
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec EC

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. C
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-664.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTORS D
With CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
E
F
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
G
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1009.
PBIB3332E
J
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-152.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injector connected to fuel tube.
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected. L
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays M
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray O
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIA9666J P
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.),
the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection
logic).

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
Trouble diagnosis
name
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
0172 too rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
SULT-III.
5. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
NOTE:
If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
NOTE:
b. Start engine.

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. A
EC
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- D
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected. E
8. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a mal- F
function. BBIA0701E
a. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. G
NOTE:
H
If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
I
NOTE: J
b. Start engine. K
L
CAUTION: M
e. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-767, "Diagnosis Procedure". N

AABWA0321GB
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
C
[Engine is running]
3 G A/F sensor 1 heater
• Idle speed
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine) D
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE E
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed F
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
25 V Fuel injector No. 4 G

31 L Fuel injector No. 1 H
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
I
PBIA4943J J
49 W A/F sensor 1 • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm fuel ratio. K
L
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK M

N
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1 49
2 53
BBIA0699E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

With CONSULT-III

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST

At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec A

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTORS
C
With CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. D
E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1009.
H
PBIB3332E
I
1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-152.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injector connected to fuel tube. J
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
4. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
K
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. L
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. M
Refer to EC-632. N
>> INSPECTION END

O

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor (4) is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
• Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1)
• Fuel pressure regulator (2)
• Fuel level sensor (3)
BBIA0704E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature
[°C (°F)]
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
voltage. Doing so may result damage the ECM's transistor. Use

ground other than ECM, such as ground.
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals (Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit is
sensor circuit range/per-
0181 from engine coolant temperature sensor and in- open or shorted)
formance
take air temperature sensor. • Fuel tank temperature sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-771, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than 60°C (140°F).
WITH GST
A
EC
P
BBWA2636E


BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector (1).
- : Vehicle front
BBIA0702E
4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and combination A
meter terminal 24. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.
D
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
E
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR F
Refer to, EC-773, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
Perform EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END I

J
terminal 4 and 5 by heating with hot water as shown in the fig-
K
ure.

L
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
2. If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. M
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005532611 N

Refer to FL-6, "Removal and Installation". O

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor (4) is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
BBIA0704E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature
[°C (°F)]
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
voltage. Doing so may result damage the ECM's transistor. Use

ground other than ECM, such as ground.
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
0182 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM. (Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is open or shorted.)
0183 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM. • Fuel tank temperature sensor
NOTE:

EC
BBWA2636E
P


BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector (1).
- : Vehicle front
BBIA0702E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and combination
meter terminal 24. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. C
Check the following. D
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
E
Refer to, EC-777, "Component Inspection". F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. G

Perform EC-632. H
>> INSPECTION END

I
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J

terminal 4 and 5 by heating with hot water as shown in the fig-
ure.
K

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 L
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
2. If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
M
PBIB0931E

N
Refer to FL-6, "Removal and Installation".
O


kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the
PBIB0145E

1st (M/T)

NOTE:
Refer to EC-896.
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor (TP sensor 1)
0223 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.

2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-780, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
EC
BBWA2655E
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

tor. A
- : Vehicle front
EC
PBIB3325E
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
in harness connectors.
G
PBIB3311E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 36 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
I

J
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. L
Continuity should exist. M

OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. P
NG >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


4. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 33 (TP sensor 1 signal),
tions.
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E
step.


DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER
A
MISFIRE
EC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
0300 detected
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire de- • Incorrect fuel pressure J
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 tected • Fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire
No. 2 cylinder misfires. • Intake air leak
0302 detected
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted K
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire • Lack of fuel
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
0303 detected • Drive plate or flywheel
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 L
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire
No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Incorrect PCV hose connection
0304 detected

M
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing. N
NOTE:
O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. P
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to table below.
FIRE
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
dition should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Basic fuel schedule Basic fuel schedule in the freeze frame data × (1 ± 0.1)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F)
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F)
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Refer to the following table.
Engine speed Time

More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-III
When disconnecting each fuel injector (1) harness connector one at
a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIA9870J
Yes or No

FIRE
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9. A
Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle?
EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-1009.
C
PBIB3332E
E
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. F
2. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) in IPDM E/R (2) to release fuel pres-
sure. G
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
- : Vehicle front H
3. Start engine.
pressure. I
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- PBIB2958E
cal discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. J
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 - K
L
tion.
Spark should be generated. M

CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50 cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E N
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken. O
NOTE:
functioning.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.

FIRE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1019.
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-223, "Standard and Limit".
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I

2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-223, "Standard
and Limit".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-181, "On-Vehicle Service".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
• Fuel lines (Refer to FL-5, "Checking Fuel Line".)

FIRE
12.CHECK IGNITION TIMING A

Check the following items. Refer to EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
Items Specifications EC
Target idle speed CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
C
Ignition timing CVT: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. E
NG >> Follow the EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
13.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
H
1 49
I
2 53
BBIA0699E
Continuity should exist. J

K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 O
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a P
>> INSPECTION END

FIRE
With CONSULT-III
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST

At 2,500 rpm : 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-592, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
18.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-542, "Emission-related
>> GO TO 19.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
A
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses EC

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
• : Vehicle front C
PBIB3264E E
The MIL will not light up for these self-diagnoses. F
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is G
0327 input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
(Knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM. H
NOTE: I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. K

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
BBWA2637E
CAUTION:

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
TERMI- A
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
37 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5 V EC
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor) C
• Idle speed
D
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 37 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
F
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor (1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front I
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 37 and knock
sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power PBIB3264E
in harness or connectors. L
Refer to EC-792, "Component Inspection". M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace knock sensor. N
Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-638, "Ground Inspection". O
BBIA0698E

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and knock sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

KNOCK SENSOR
1. Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure
more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or
physically damaged. Use only new ones.
2. If NG, replace knock sensor.
SEF227W
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-195, "Component".

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder EC

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes
the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM D
receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine
revolution.
PBIA9209J E
H
PBIB2997E
I

J
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the ta-
ENG SPEED
tion. chometer indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532639 K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit is open or shorted.] M
(Accelerator pedal position sensor
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
engine cranking.
is shorted.) N
P0335 Crankshaft position sen- • The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position
(EVAP control system pressure
0335 sor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
sensor circuit is shorted.)
running.
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in O
the normal pattern during engine running.
• EVAP control system pressure sen-
sor
• Signal plate P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
BBWA3071E

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] D
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm E
at idle
Crankshaft position PBIB2998E

61 W
sensor (POS) F
Approximately 4.0 V
[Engine is running] G
PBIB2999E
H
(POS)] • Idle speed I
Sensor power supply
74 W (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
sor) J
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
K
Sensor power supply L
102 SB [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(APP sensor 2)
M

N
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
O
BBIA0698E

: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) (1) harness
connector.
PBIB3326E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3312E
3.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 75.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram

74 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1029, "Wiring Diagram"
75 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 1 EC-794, "Wiring Diagram"
76 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-853, "Wiring Diagram"
102 APP sensor terminal 5 EC-972, "Wiring Diagram"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK COMPONENTS A
• Refrigerant pressure sensor. (Refer to EC-1030.)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor. (Refer to EC-850.)
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning components.
C
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY E

2. Perform EC-580, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". F
G
>> INSPECTION END
8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 62.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ECM terminal 61. L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). P
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.


Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
PBIA9210J
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
PBIA9584J
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)


DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
A
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of EC

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts C
instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor
consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is run-
ning, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sen- D
sor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the
sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage
from the sensor changes.
PBIA9875J E
PBIB2997E
H
I

J
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the ta-
ENG SPEED
tion. chometer indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532647 K
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
L
Refer to EC-896.
M
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for [Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) cir-
the first few seconds during engine cranking. cuit is open or shorted.]
P0340 Camshaft position sensor • The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM dur- • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) N
0340 (PHASE) circuit ing engine running. • Camshaft (INT)
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal • Starter motor
pattern during engine running. • Starting system circuit
• Dead (Weak) battery O
P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
4. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
BBWA2639E

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C
COLOR
NO.
(PHASE)] • Idle speed D
1.0 - 2.0 V
[Engine is running]
E
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at F
idle
Camshaft position sensor PBIB2986E

65 G
(PHASE)
1.0 - 2.0 V G
[Engine is running]
H
PBIB2987E I
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)] J

K
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position. L
Does the engine turn over?

Does the starter motor operate? M
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-16, "Trouble Diagnosis with Multitasking Battery Diagnostic N
Station".)
2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS O
P

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) (1) har-
ness connector.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3327E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB3312E
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 63.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ECM terminal 65.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
Refer to EC-803, "Component Inspection". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). E
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft (1) rear end F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
H
PBIA9557J
I
Refer to EC-632.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. L
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. M
PBIA9876J
P

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6. If NG, replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
PBIA9584J
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)


DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
A
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) EC
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 C
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way D
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YB E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
• Intake air leaks G
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
• Fuel injector
0420 below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing H
NOTE: I
J
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
K
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). M
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. N
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. O
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
will take approximately 5 minutes). P
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 50 (HO2S2 signal)
and ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-806, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB2996E
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
Check the following items. Refer to EC-574, "Basic Inspection".

Items Specifications A
Target idle speed CVT: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
EC
Ignition timing CVT: 13 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR E
1. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. F
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 25, 29, 30, 31 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-1010, "Wiring Diagram".
Voltage: Battery voltage G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. H
NG >> Perform EC-1011, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAUTION: I
2. Remove fuel pump (1) fuse in IPDM E/R (2) to release fuel pres- J
sure.
NOTE:
sure applies again during the following procedure. K
- : Vehicle front
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel L
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- PBIB2958E M
cal discharge from the ignition coils.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. N
portion as shown in the figure. O
tion.
P
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50 cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E


NOTE:
functioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1019.
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-223, "Standard and Limit".
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
SEF156I

the grounded portion.

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-223, "Standard
and Limit".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
Refer to EC-632.

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END A

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
EC

NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB3640E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
lenoid valve stuck closed
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper con-
• EVAP control system does not operate prop-
nection of rubber tube
erly.
P0441 EVAP control system in- • Blocked rubber tube
• EVAP control system has a leak between in-
0441 correct purge flow • Cracked EVAP canister
take manifold and EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor.
lenoid valve circuit
• Blocked purge port
• Drain filter
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
EC
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) C

VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) D
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm
E
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 0°C
If TESTING is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC- F
811, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
H
WITH GST
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 42 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground. J
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute. K
Air conditioner switch ON

L
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON PBIB3313E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm M

Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1 V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second. N
O
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-III
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-525, "Description".
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V VACUUM

100% Should exist.
0% should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-525, "Description".
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.

6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-525, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
SEF367U

3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG A
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. EC
SEF368U
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE D
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR I
J
Water should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
L
Refer to EC-851 or DTC P0452 and EC-859 for DTC P0453.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. O
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11.CHECK DRAIN FILTER P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace Drain filter.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace it.
>> GO TO 15.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

A
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. EC
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB3640E
I
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used J
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. K
trol valve.
L
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
P0442 • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
(negative pressure) erly. M
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is N
missing or damaged
• Drain filter
• EVAP control system pressure sensor O
P
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Check the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information"
before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON.
- If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-816, "Diagnosis Procedure".
- If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-811, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0441.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. A
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION EC
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. E
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP F
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
For the location of EVAP service port (2), refer to EC-525, "Descrip-
tion".
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1) G
• : Vehicle front
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the H
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0703E
SEF916U
M
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6.
N
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
With CONSULT-III O
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of P
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The
valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.)
- EVAP control system pressure sensor (1)
- EVAP canister (2)
- EVAP canister vent control valve (3)
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and
EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure BBIA0693E
in the system.
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-525, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Check the following,
Refer to EC-529, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

attached. A
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11. EC
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 14.
C
D
PBIB1213E

E
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sorattached.
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 12. G
Check the following. H
• EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection
I
J
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. M
NG >> GO TO 15.
N
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine. O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-602, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
Refer to EC-525.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
>> GO TO 21.
nection. For location, refer to EC-532.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
Refer to DI-20.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25. A
EC
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END C

DRAIN FILTER D
E
5. Block port B. F
G
PBIB3641E

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM
function

Throttle position sensor Throttle position EVAP can-
ister purge
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control solenoid valve
flow control
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIA9215J

• Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V Neutral (M/T) even slightly, after engine starting)
• No load 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%

The canister purge flow is detected during • EVAP control system pressure sensor
EC
the vehicle is stopped while the engine is • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
A) running, even when EVAP canister purge lenoid valve
volume control solenoid valve is completely (EVAP canister purge volume control so- C
EVAP canister purge closed. lenoid valve is stuck open.)
P0443
volume control solenoid • EVAP canister vent control valve
0443
valve The canister purge flow is detected during • Drain filter
the specified driving conditions, even when • EVAP canister D
B) • Hoses
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve is completely closed. (Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
E

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. F
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G
TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform "DTC Confirmation Procedure" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed H
• Cool the vehicle so that engine coolant temperature becomes same level as ambient temperature. I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
J
2. Check that the following condition are met.
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 – 35°C (32 – 95°F)
K
With GST L
2. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminal 43 (FTT sensor signal)
and ground. M
3. Check that the voltage is 3.1 – 4.2 V.
N
O
PBIB0679E
P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
With CONSULT-III
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
826, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With GST

EC
ABBWA0361GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed

9 P PBIB0050E
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning ig-
(11 - 14 V)
nition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
(1) harness connector.
- EVAP service port (2)
- : Vehicle front
BBIA0703E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or A
tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. C
PBIB0080E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

E
F
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 9 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness con- K
nector.
- EVAP canister (2)
- EVAP canister vent control valve (3) L
Water should not exist. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. BBIA0693E
N
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7. P
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1213E

attached.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

A
14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END C

D
With CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control E
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity F

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No G
PBIA9668J H
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions. I

Condition J
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
K
No supply No
PBIA9560J
L
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE M


DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM
function

Throttle position sensor Throttle position EVAP can-
ister purge
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control solenoid valve
flow control
Vehicle speed*2
Combination meter
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIA9215J

• Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V Neutral (M/T) even slightly, after engine starting)
• No load 2,000 rpm 0 - 50%

VALVE
• Harness or connectors EC
(EVAP canister purge volume control
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent solenoid valve circuit is open or short-
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve ed.)
open C
lenoid valve
P0445
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
(EVAP canister purge volume control D
control solenoid valve circuit solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
0445 to ECM through the valve
shorted • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
E
NOTE:
F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. G
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-833, "Diagnosis Procedure". H

VALVE
ABBWA0361GB
CAUTION:

VALVE
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
C
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
slightly, after engine starting. D

9 P PBIB0050E
E
Approximately 10 V
[Engine is running] F
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
G
PBIB0520E
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] H
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
• More than a few seconds after turning ig-
BATTERY VOLTAGE I
(11 - 14 V)
nition switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] J
(11 - 14 V)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532680 K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
(1) harness connector.
- EVAP canister port (2) M
O
BBIA0693E

VALVE
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF206W

FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 9 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control A
Condition Air passage continuity EC

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No C
PBIA9668J
D
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control E

Condition
between A and B
F

Yes
terminals 1 and 2
G
No supply No
PBIA9560J
H
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE I


DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
The EVAP canister vent control valve (3) is located on the EVAP
canister (2) and is used to seal the canister vent.
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
PBIB3642E
control system diagnoses.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (1)
BBIA0693E

(EVAP canister vent control valve circuit
P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.
• Drain filter
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.

EC
AABWA0224GB
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
valve (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
1.INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve (3) harness con-
nector.
- EVAP canister (2)
BBIA0693E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
C
PBIB0080E

E
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
F
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 28 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. H

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. J
NG >> GO TO 6.
K
• Harness connectors M13, B102 L
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
PBIB1033E

Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

ON No
OFF Yes
If NG, go to next step.
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-III
rusted.
PBIB1033E

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions. A
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B EC

No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes C
If NG, go to next step. PBIB1034E
4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent D

control valve using an air blower.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. E

The EVAP canister vent control valve (3) is located on the EVAP
canister (2) and is used to seal the canister vent.
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
PBIB3642E
control system diagnoses.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (1)
BBIA0693E

and the circuit
P0448 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains
• Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
0448 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions.
vent control valve
• Drain filter
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
4. Repeat next procedures three times.

a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 min-
utes. A
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC. EC
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times. C
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
D
PBIB0972E
8. Check 1st trip DTC. G


AABWA0224GB
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
valve (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE D
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE E
(11 - 14 V)
F
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve (3). G
- EVAP canister (2) H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. I
J
BBIA0693E
2.CHECK DRAIN FILTER K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. N
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. O

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1213E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor (1) harness
connector.
- EVAP canister (2)
BBIA0693E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. A
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC
4. Turn ignition switch ON. C
PBIB1033E
E
F
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

ON No G
OFF Yes
If NG, go to next step. H
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. J
rusted.
K
M
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the N
O
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No
terminals 1 and 2
P
OFF Yes
If NG, go to next step. PBIB1034E
4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent

control valve using an air blower.
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
The EVAP control system pressure sensor (1) detects pressure in

the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases.
• EVAP canister vent control valve (3)
BBIA0693E
PBIB1207E

is shorted.]
EVAP control system is shorted.)
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
0451 control system pressure sensor
mance shorted.)
NOTE:
NOTE:

3. Check 1st trip DTC. A
EC

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
D
BBIA0698E
G
: Vehicle front
1. Body ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. engine ground F16
H
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
J
connector.
- EVAP canister (2)
- EVAP canister vent control valve (3) K
Water should not exist. L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. M
BBIA0693E

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. N

O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-38.)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
Refer to EC-632.
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-853, "Wiring Diagram".
>> INSPECTION END


terminal 42 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and
ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage (V)
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5 V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. PBIB3314E
• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or

pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

A
The EVAP control system pressure sensor (1) detects pressure in EC

pressure increases.
• EVAP canister vent control valve (3) C
BBIA0693E E
H
PBIB1207E

I

J
K
L
(EVAP control system pressure sensor M
is shorted.)
EVAP control system (Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit N
pressure sensor low in- is shorted.)
0452 sent to ECM.
put (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

WITH CONSULT-III
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
WITH GST
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel tank temper-
ature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2 V.
SEF113U

EC
AABWA0225GB
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
sure sensor
51 O (EVAP control system pres- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR

connector. A
- EVAP canister (2)
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
BBIA0693E
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I D

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
G
PBIB0138E
H
• Harness connectors E8, F8 I
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM J
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II K
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal L
76.
Continuity should exist. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. N
Check the following. O
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM P


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK COMPONENTS
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
51. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14. C
Check the following. D
• Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 16.
Refer to EC-632.
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM L
M
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage (V)
(mmHg, inHg)
N
CAUTION:
O
P

The EVAP control system pressure sensor (1) detects pressure in

pressure increases.
• EVAP canister vent control valve (3)
BBIA0693E
PBIB1207E

is shorted.)
is shorted.)
EVAP control system
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is shorted.)
pressure sensor high in-
0453 sent to ECM. • EVAP control system pressure sensor
put
• EVAP canister
• Drain filter
• Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve

A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III C
3. Turn ignition switch ON. D
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
WITH GST F
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 43 (Fuel tank temper-
ature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2 V.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-861, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
SEF113U

AABWA0225GB
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
sure sensor
51 O (EVAP control system pres- • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V C
Sensor power supply
74 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V D
sensor)
Sensor power supply
75 BR [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V E
(POS)]
F
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
G
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS H

Refer to EC-638, "Ground Inspection". I
L
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
M
1. Engine ground E24 2. Engine ground F9 3. Engine ground F16
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR O

connector.
- EVAP canister (2)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0693E
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal
76.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram A

EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK COMPONENTS D

E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
F
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-969, "Component Inspection". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. H
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. I
J
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. N
NG >> GO TO 12.
O
• Harness connectors B102, M13 P
SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
15.CHECK RUBBER TUBE
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 20.
No >> GO TO 22.
PBIB1213E

20.CHECK EVAP CANISTER A

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sorattached.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> GO TO 21.
C
21. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
• EVAP canister for damage D
• EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. E

Refer to EC-632. F
>> INSPECTION END

G

H
I
J
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage (V)
(mmHg, inHg)
K
CAUTION: L

M

This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB3640E
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
• EVAP control system has a very large leak • EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system such as fuel filler cap fell off. leaks
0455 gross leak detected • EVAP control system does not operate prop- • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
erly. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
• Drain filter
lenoid valve and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.

NOTE:
• Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve A
properly.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. C
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard. D
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met. E
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode F
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to G
EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III and make sure that “EVAP H
GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-867, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-816, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST I
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information"
before driving vehicle. J
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-542, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle. K
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON.
L
• If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-811, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0441.
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-816, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0442.
• If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-867, "Diagnosis Procedure".
M
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN N

OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
P
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-525.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
• EVAP canister vent control is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
For the location of EVAP service port (2), refer to EC-525, "Description".
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1)

• : Vehicle front
NOTE: A
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EC
BBIA0703E
G
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 10. H

I
With CONSULT-III
J
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. K
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 12.
N
SEF200U
O
Without CONSULT-III P

2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve (3). The
valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.)
- EVAP canister (2)
BBIA0693E
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
SEF200U

With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
OK or NG A
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. EC
With CONSULT-III C
1. Start engine.
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 18.
18.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR I
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 19.
19.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE K
Check refueling EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and
improper connection. For location, refer to EC-532.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 20.
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
20.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE M
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
>> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 22.
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
Refer to EC-632.

>> INSPECTION END
DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

A
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume EC
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. C
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB3640E
I
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used J
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. K
trol valve.
L
Evaporative emission • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP system has a very small leak.
P0456 control system very • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
• EVAP system does not operate prop- M
0456 small leak (negative • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
erly.
pressure check) valve and the circuit
• Drain filter N
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol- P
ume control solenoid valve
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.

NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle
for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed.
- Refilled or drained the fuel.
- EVAP component parts is/are removed.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4 V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
• If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go
to EC-574, "Basic Inspection".
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
• Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port (2).
- EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1)
- : Vehicle front
BBIA0703E

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP A
service port adapter.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
EC
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied. C
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and D
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-875, "Diagnosis Procedure".
8. Disconnect GST. E
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. F
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual. G
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN H

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. J
SEF915U L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. N

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port (2), refer to EC-525, "Description".
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (1)
• : Vehicle front
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
BBIA0703E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6.
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III

2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve (3). The
valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) A
- EVAP canister (2)
EC
BBIA0693E
D
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION: E
F
Refer to EC-525, "Description". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace. H
I
SEF200U

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
Check the following. L
• EVAP canister vent control valve. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. N
O
attached.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 14.
PBIB1213E

attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.

With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 18.
18.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 19.
19.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
I
J
>> GO TO 21.
21.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE K
nection. For location, refer to EC-532.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 22.
22.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
23.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE O

OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 24.
Refer to DI-20.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
The fuel level sensor (3) is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The EC
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari- C
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
• Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (1) D
• Fuel tank temperature sensor (4)
BBIA0704E E
NOTE: F
to EC-895.
G
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
H
(CAN communication line is open or I
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal be-
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit • Harness or connectors
ing varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to
0460 noise (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or short-
ECM. J
ed)
K
NOTE:
L
1. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. M
N
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-11, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-11, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
P
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.


Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


A
BBIA0704E E
NOTE: F
to EC-895.
G
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
H
(CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted) I
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even • Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis- (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or short-
tance. ed)
J
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000005532733 K
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
L
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel.
Refer to GI-3, "General Precaution".
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-III N
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. O
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. P
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.

13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03 V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-582, "Fuel Pressure Check".
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.

Refer to DI-11, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
BBIA0704E E
NOTE: F
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
UXXXX.
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
G
P0607. Refer to EC-895.
H
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
• Harness or connectors I
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (Fuel level sensor circuit is open or short-
0463 high input sent to ECM. ed)
• Fuel level sensor J
K
NOTE:
L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at ignition
switch ON.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532739 N

Refer to DI-11, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.


Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS
A
NOTE: EC
to EC-895.
The vehicle speed signal is sent from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” or combination meter C
through CAN communication line
D
E
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
The vehicle speed signal sent to ECM is
Vehicle speed sensor almost km/h (0 MPH) even when vehicle
0500 (Vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) F
is being driven.
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected item Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H

Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (High) while engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532743 I
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
NOTE:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
L
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON- M
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. N
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
O

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) P
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

DTC P0500 VSS
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
WITH GST
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-4.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed C
from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
F
Idle speed control sys-
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle speed • Electric throttle control actuator
tem RPM lower than ex- G
0506 by 100 rpm or more. • Intake air leak
pected

H
NOTE:
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1035.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
L
M

N
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2.REPLACE ECM P
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.

>> INSPECTION END

A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed C
from signals of camshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
F
Idle speed control sys- • Electric throttle control actuator
P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem RPM higher than • Intake air leak G
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
expected • PCV system

H
NOTE:
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1035.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
L
M
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

N
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
O
1. Start engine and let it idle. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
3.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.

2. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal EC

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J E
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. G
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
I
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
• ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring. J
• ECM deactivates ASCD operation.

K
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. L
NOTE:
M
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B O
3. Check 1st trip DTC. P
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.

DTC P0605 ECM
1.INSPECTION START
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-893, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
3. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0607 ECM
DTC P0607 ECM
A
D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T and CVT).
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis (M/T).
E
P0607 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM F
0607 sis for CAN controller of each control unit.
G
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-895, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
1.INSPECTION START I
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. J
Yes or No
K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM L
1. Replace ECM.
Refer to BL-249, "ECM Re-communicating Function". M
6. Perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning". N
>> INSPECTION END

O

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Trouble diagnosis
name
(Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted.)
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for [Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
0643 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.]
• Throttle position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

EC
BBWA2649E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 GR
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V
(APP sensor 1)
110 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
111 R • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (1) harness
connector.
EC
D
BBIA0705E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIA9606J H
3.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
I
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 106.
J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS L
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram M

72 Throttle position sensor terminal 1 EC-978, "Wiring Diagram"
78 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 EC-800, "Wiring Diagram"
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
When the shift lever position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. (M/T) EC
When the shift lever position is P or N, transmission range switch is ON. (A/T and CVT)
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005532767 C

D
Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT),
ON
E
Shift lever: Except above OFF
• Harness or connectors G
[Park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit
The park/neutral position (PNP) signal is not
P0850 is open or shorted.]
Park/neutral position switch changed in the process of engine starting and
0850 • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T) H
driving.
• Transmission range switch (A/T and
CVT)

I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
K
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig- L
nal under the following conditions.
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal M

N or P position (A/T, CVT)
ON
Except above OFF N
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. O
P
More than 1,200 rpm (CVT)
ENG SPEED More than 1,450 rpm (A/T)
More than 1,900 rpm (M/T)

2.4 - 31.8 msec (CVT)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.4 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
1.7 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64km/h (29 MPH)
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 (PNP signal) and
Condition (Shift lever) Voltage (Known-good data)

P or N position (A/T, CVT) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Neutral position (M/T) (11 - 14 V)
Except above Approx. 0 V
SEC910C

EC
ABBWA0364GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
69 L PNP signal Neutral (M/T)
Approximately 0 V
• Except above
A/T MODELS AND CVT MODELS

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect transmission range switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between transmission range switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
A/T CVT
PBIB3002E JMBIA2080ZZ

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
• Harness for open or short between transmission range switch and fuse
3. Check harness continuity between transmission range switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 69.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A

Refer to AT-94, "Component Inspection" (A/T), CVT-65, "Component Inspection" (CVT).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> Replace transmission range switch.
C
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END D

M/T MODELS
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with F
Voltage: Battery voltage G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
I
PBIB3003E

Check the following. J
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse
K
L
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 3 and ECM terminal 69.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O
4.CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-57. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
Refer to EC-632.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
A
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. EC
• Harness or connectors C
The closed loop control function does not oper- [Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open
P1148 Closed loop control
ate even when vehicle is driving in the specified or shorted.]
1148 function
condition. • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater D
NOTE:
DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. E

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred via the CAN communication line from “ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Always erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not illuminate for this self-diagnosis.
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
TCS control unit
1211 “ABS actuator electric unit (control unit)” • TCS related parts
TESTING CONDITION:
Go to BRC-60, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
A
NOTE: EC
to EC-895.
The CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse C
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Always erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. D
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. E
The MIL will not illuminate for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
ECM cannot receive the information from
P1212 (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
TCS communication line “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
1212 • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) G
unit)” continuously.
• Dead (Weak) battery
H
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. I
J
Go to BRC-60, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".

K

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
to EC-895.
Cooling Fan Control


Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
Combination meter control (Cooling fan relays)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
Models with A/C
PBIB2483E
Models without A/C
PBIB3335E

Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. A
Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan speed EC
1 2 3
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
C
High (HI) ON ON ON

D
Monitor item Condition Specification E

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.) F
OFF
(207°F) or less
• Engine: After warming up, idle G
Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN the engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HIGH
(212°F) or more H
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will I
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. J
• Harness or connectors K
(Cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
• Cooling fan
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
heat). L
• Radiator hose
• Cooling fan system does not operate properly
• Radiator
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat).
• Reservoir tank
1217 (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system
• Radiator cap
using the proper filling method. M
• Water pump
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Thermostat
range.
• Water control valve
For more information, refer to EC-917, N
"Main 13 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-36, "Changing Engine O
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-18, "Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-15, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. P
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the reservoir tank or the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-914,
"Diagnosis Procedure" or EC-914, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-914,
"Diagnosis Procedure" or EC-914, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-III. SEF621W
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-914, "Diagnosis Procedure" or EC-914, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-914,
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-914,
3. Perform IPDM/ER auto active test and check cooling fan motor
operation. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
4. If NG, go to EC-914, "Diagnosis Procedure". SEF621W

EC
BBWA2997E
P

BBWA3001E
1.INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION A

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
NG >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
D
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan operation.
Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test".
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 8. F
4.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Refer to CO-36, "Inspection". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-36, "Inspection". H
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump
I
5.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Refer to CO-39, "Checking Radiator Cap".
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
6.CHECK COMPONENT PARTS K

• Thermostat. (Refer to CO-46.)
L
• Water control valve. (Refer to CO-48.)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor. (Refer to EC-684.)
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
7.CHECK MAIN 13 CAUSES N
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-917, "Main 13 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END O

8.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB2067E

• 50 A fusible link
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

10.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E46 and E48.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 59, 39 and ground.

OK or NG
OK (Models with A/C)>>GO TO 11.
OK (Models without A/C)>>GO TO 13.
2. Check harness continuity between the followings;
Cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 20, 24.
Cooling fan motor terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 12.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
• Resistor E5
2. Check harness continuity between the followings;
Cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 20.

Cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 24.
Cooling fan motor terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 23. A
Cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground E
F
15.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
Perform EC-632.
OK or NG I
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Main 13 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000005532780
J
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference K

• Blocked radiator
• Blocked condenser
1 • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked radiator grille
L
• Blocked bumper
OFF 2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester See MA-15, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio".
Coolant up to MAX level in M
3 • Coolant level • Visual reservoir tank and radiator See CO-36, "Inspection".
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester See CO-39, "Checking Radiator Cap".
N
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks See CO-36, "Inspection".
• Touch the upper and
ON*2 6 • Thermostat
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot See CO-46, and CO-48
O
See trouble diagnosis for
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating DTC P1217 (EC-914, "Di-
agnosis Procedure").
P
• Color checker chemical
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
• Coolant temperature Gauge less than 3/4 when
• Visual —
gauge driving
ON*3 9
• Coolant overflow to res- No overflow during driving See CO-36, "Changing
• Visual
ervoir tank and idling Engine Coolant".

Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference
• Coolant return from res- Should be initial level in
OFF*4 10
ervoir tank to radiator
• Visual
reservoir tank
See CO-36, "Inspection".
• Remove and inspect See CO-48, "Removal

OFF 11 • Water control valve Within the specified value
the valve and Installation"
• Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
12 • Cylinder head See EM-181.
gauge mum distortion (warping)
OFF
• Cylinder block and pis- No scuffing on cylinder
13 • Visual See EM-195.
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-33.
COOLING FAN MOTOR

Model with A/C
check operation.
Terminals
Cooling fan motor (+) (-)
1 2
SEF888V
Models without A/C

check operation.
terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
Low
2 3
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W


DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator G
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532784 H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532785 L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
and the housing. N
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. O
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
P
BBIA0711E


DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-137.

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator G
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532789 H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. K
L
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY M

3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1) N
and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. P
BBIA0711E


DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-137.

DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
A
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition. EC
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine • Lack of intake air volume D
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with • Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. • ECM
E
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at F
• If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
TESTING CONDITION: G
WITH CONSULT-III
I
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1. J
K
L
Perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? M
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. N
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
O
• Crushed intake air passage
• Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Perform EC-758, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0171.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Go to EC-761, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0171.
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
A
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation EC
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
E
BBIA0707E
1. ASCD steering switch 2. MAIN switch 3. CANCEL switch F

4. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 5. SET/COAST switch
Refer to EC-522 for the ASCD function.

G
Specification data are reference values. H

MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON I
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF J
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON K
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON L
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
M
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. N
Refer to EC-893.
Trouble diagnosis O
name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. P
• ECM detects that input signal from the
P1564 (ASCD switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
1564 • ASCD steering switch
range.
• ECM
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
is stuck ON.

NOTE:
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.

EC
ABBWA0362GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4 V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
Approximately 0 V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
94 R ASCD steering switch Approximately 1 V
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 3 V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 2 V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Engine is running]
95 B Sensor ground • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
• Idle speed

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF

Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
A
RESUME/AC- Pressed ON
CELERATE RESUME/ACC SW
switch Released OFF
Pressed ON EC
SET/COAST
SET SW
switch Released OFF
C
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 94 and ground with press-
ing each button. D
Switch Condition Voltage (V)

E
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 1.0 F
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed Approx. 3.0 PBIB3343E

ATE switch Released Approx. 4.0 G
Pressed Approx. 2.0
SET/COAST switch
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3. I
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M31. J
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 95.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. M
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
O
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 94 and combination switch terminal 14.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M31.
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch Condition Resistance (Ω)

Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480 PBIB2549E

switch Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 660
SET/COAST switch
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch (2) is EC

turned OFF and stop lamp switch (1) is turned ON. ECM detects the
state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
C
BBIA0708E E

• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T, CVT) G
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully re- ON
leased (M/T)
BRAKE SW1
• Ignition switch: ON • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T,
(ASCD brake switch) H
CVT)
OFF
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slight-
ly depressed (M/T)
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF I
BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532805 J

K
NOTE:
to EC-893.
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not L
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. M
Trouble diagnosis
name
N
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 • Harness or connectors
MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch (Stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
at the same time. (ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) O
(ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T)
P1572
1572
ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch P
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM • ASCD brake switch
B) for extremely long time while the vehicle is • ASCD clutch switch (M/T)
driving • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T)
• ECM

CAUTION:
NOTE:
• Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 6 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up.
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
Vehicle speed More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
6. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
Vehicle speed More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

Depress the brake pedal for more than 5
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
WITH GST

EC
ABBWA0429GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0 V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de- Approximately 0 V
pressed (M/T)
100 G ASCD brake switch
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T, CVT)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released
(11 - 14 V)
(M/T)
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
M/T models
Condition Indication
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON
A/T and CVT models
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 100 and ground under the
M/T models
Condition Voltage
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0 V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
A/T and CVT models
Condition Voltage
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0 V PBIB3315E
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T and CVT models) >>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Condition Indication A
EC
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions. C
Condition Voltage
D
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0 V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
E
PBIB0311E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 11. G
3.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch (1) harness connector.
- Clutch pedal (2)
I
K
BBIA0709E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and L

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or
tester.
M
Condition Voltage
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0 V N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
O
4.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY


2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch (2) harness connector.
- Stop lamp switch (1)
BBIA0708E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and


OK or NG
OK (M/T models) >>GO TO 6.
OK (A/T and CVT models) >>GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 100 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. A
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
9.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 100 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. E
10.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-938, "Component Inspection" F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. G
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch (1) harness connector.
- ASCD brake switch (2)
K
BBIA0708E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. L
PBIB3317E
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
• 10 A fuse

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
Refer to EC-938, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Condition Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, and
perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.

3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. A
Clutch pedal: Fully released. Should exist. EC
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-6, and C
SEC023D
D
STOP LAMP SWITCH
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. E
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
H
PBIB3318E
Condition Continuity I
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
J
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, and perform step 3 again.

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from "ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)" or combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control mod-
ule). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-522 for ASCD functions.
NOTE:
to EC-887.
to EC-893.
to EC-895.
Trouble diagnosis
name
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle (Combination meter circuit is open or shorted.)
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. • TCM
• ECM
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
3. Check DTC.

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39 (A/T) or CVT-27 (CVT).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT”
Refer to BRC-10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER A
Check combination meter function.

Refer to DI-4.
EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
A/T
A/T : Description INFOID:0000000005532814
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for
engine control.
A/T : CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005532815

I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
A/T : On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532816
NOTE:
to EC-793.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340.
Refer to EC-799.
to EC-893.
to EC-895.
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.
Input speed sensor signal is different from
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
P1715 Input speed sensor the theoretical value calculated by ECM
1715 (TCM output) from output speed sensor signal and en-
(Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted)
gine rpm signal.
• TCM
A/T : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532817

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-42.
>> INSPECTION END

CVT
CVT : Description INFOID:0000000005532818
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line.
CVT : CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005532819

Monitor item Condition Specification A

I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)
EC
CVT : On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000005532820
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX. C
to EC-793.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340. D
Refer to EC-799.
to EC-893.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer E
to EC-895.
The MIL will not lights up for this diagnosis.
F
Input speed sensor signal is different from
(CAN communication line is open or shorted) G
P1715 Input speed sensor the theoretical value calculated by ECM
1715 (TCM output) from output speed sensor signal and en-
(Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted)
gine rpm signal.
• TCM
H
CVT : DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532821
CAUTION: I
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-943, "CVT : Diagnosis Procedure".
CVT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532822
L
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to CVT-27.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
N
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to CVT-159, "Removal and Installation".
O
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for • Harness or connectors
P1805
Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv- (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1805
ing. • Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode.
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
Engine: Idling Normal
Accelerating Poor acceleration

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC.

EC
AABWA0322GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0 V
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
- Brake pedal (2)
BBIA0710E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
PBIB3317E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch (1) harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 99.
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to EC-632.
H
>> INSPECTION END
I
STOP LAMP SWITCH
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
K
PBIB3318E
N
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist. O
P

DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.

These self-diagnoses have one trip detection logic.
P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
AABWA0227GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2 V

1 L
PBIA8150J

supply (11 - 14 V)
Approximately 1.8 V

• Engine stopped
PBIA8149J
BATTERY VOLTAGE

SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9569J
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 15 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.


EC
4.CHECK FUSE C
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 8.
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I E
lowing conditions with CONSULT-III or tester. F
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0 V G
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14 V)
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. PBIA9568J
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O
Refer to EC-632.
P
OK or NG

DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE:
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-948or EC-963.
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
2101 performance ate properly. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.
3. Check DTC.

EC
AABWA0226GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2 V

1 L
PBIA8150J

supply (11 - 14 V)
Approximately 1.8 V

• Engine stopped
PBIA8149J
BATTERY VOLTAGE

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

lowing conditions with CONSULT-III or tester. A
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0 V EC
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14 V)
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3. PBIA9568J
D
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
F
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. H
• Harness connectors E8, F8 I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. K
SULT-III or tester.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. M
NG >> GO TO 6.
N
PBIA9569J
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. O
Refer to Wiring Diagram. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


8.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Refer to EC-632.
OK or NG
tor.
- : Vehicle front

ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist.
5 PBIB3325E
4 Should exist.
1 Should exist.
6
4 Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
BBIA0711E

OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.
Refer to EC-632.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D
3. Perform EC-580, "Idle Air Volume Learning". E
>> INSPECTION END

F
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR G

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
H
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step. I
J
PBIB2909E
K
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L

Refer to EM-137.

DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.

EC
AABWA0228GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2 V

1 L
PBIA8150J

supply (11 - 14 V)
Approximately 1.8 V

• Engine stopped
PBIA8149J
BATTERY VOLTAGE

BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

tor. A
- : Vehicle front
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC

ECM terminal Continuity C
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist.
5 PBIB3325E
4 Should exist. D
1 Should exist.
6
4 Should not exist.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
F
Refer to EC-961, "Component Inspection". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. H
Refer to EC-632. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
2. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". K
>> INSPECTION END L
M
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. N
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

O
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
P
PBIB2909E

Refer to EM-137.

DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C
angle properly in response to driving condition.
D
E
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion. F
P2119 Electric throttle control
2119 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. H
Malfunction A
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The I
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. J
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T, CVT), neutral (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed 1,000
rpm or more.

K
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
M
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. N
3. Set shift lever to P position (A/T, CVT) or Neutral position (M/T).
O
6. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds.
7. Set shift lever to P position (A/T, CVT) or Neutral position (M/T).
P
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.

3. Set shift lever to N, P position (A/T, CVT) or Neutral (M/T) position.
5. Check DTC.

3. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0711E

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
F

G

ACCEL SEN 1 H

ACCEL SEN 2*
I
CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage. J
K
NOTE:
Refer to EC-896. L
M
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1) N
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. O

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 P
degrees.
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.
BBWA2652E

A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- EC
TER-
MI- WIRE C
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply D
(APP sensor 2)
E
103 GR
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed G
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON] H
110 G
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON] I
[Engine is running]
111 R
Sensor ground
• Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
J
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005532859 K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
M
BBIA0698E
P
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

connector.
BBIA0705E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and APP sensor terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

3. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". A
>> INSPECTION END EC

Refer to EC-632.
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110 (APP sensor 1 sig-
F
nal), 103 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
G
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V H
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4 V PBIA9572J
I
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
J
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005532861 K
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-4. L


are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
signals.
PBIB1741E

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.
P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
is shorted.]
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP shorted.)
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • EVAP control system pressure sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.

A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
C
2. Check DTC.
D

BBWA3074E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply C
(POS)]
76 W
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V D
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) E
103 GR
sensor 2
F
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply H
(APP sensor 1)
• Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9 V I
110 G
J
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1) K
• Idle speed
L
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. M
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
connector.
BBIA0705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS

OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
Continuity should exist. D

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY K
3. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". L
>> INSPECTION END M

Refer to EC-632. N
>> INSPECTION END

O

P

conditions.

sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V


ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-4.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E

• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V G
1st (M/T)
H
I
NOTE:
J
Refer to EC-896.
K
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or short-
P2135 Throttle position sensor
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 ed.)
2135 circuit range/performance L
and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M

N
degrees.
So, the acceleration will be poor. O
NOTE: P
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
BBWA2657E
CAUTION:

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC
NO.
• Engine stopped C
More than 0.36 V
[Ignition switch: ON] D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
E
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released F
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor) H
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
I
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS J

Refer to EC-638, "Ground Inspection". K
N
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
O
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
tor.
- : Vehicle front
PBIB3325E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3311E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 36.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between the following;
electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 33,
electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 34.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A
>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END C

D
2. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". E
4. Set shift lever to D position (A/T, CVT) or 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 33 (TP sensor 1 signal), F
tions.
G
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V H

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
PBIB3038E I
step.
7. Perform EC-580, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". J
K
L

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
signals.
PBIB1741E

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

NOTE:
Refer to EC-896.
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 circuit is shorted.)
tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
performance and APP sensor 2.
shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. EC

C
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. D
TESTING CONDITION:
E
2. Check DTC.
F

BBWA3075E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply C
(POS)]
76 W
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5 V D
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) E
103 GR
sensor 2
F
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply H
(APP sensor 1)
• Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9 V I
110 G
J
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1) K
• Idle speed
L
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. M
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
connector.
BBIA0705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9607J


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram A

EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS D

E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 11.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
3. Check harness continuity between the following; H
ECM terminal 111 and APP sensor terminal 2,
ECM terminal 104 and APP sensor terminal 1.
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
1. Check harness continuity between the following;
ECM terminal 110 and APP sensor terminal 3, L
ECM terminal 103 and APP sensor terminal 6.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR O

OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END


conditions.

sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V


ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-4.

DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen- EC
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor C
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current D
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this PBIB3353E E
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000005532887 I

J
2,000 rpm
K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be L
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
M
• The output voltage computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
P2A00 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 a specified period.
• Fuel pressure
2A00 circuit range/performance • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
N
sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a
specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000005532889 O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

SULT-III.
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
WITH GST
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness
connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
BBIA0701E
utes.

EC
AABWA0319GB
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
engine)
PBIA8148J


BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-140, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 and P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine? C
Without CONSULT-III D
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. E
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. F
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. G
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 and P0172 detected?
BBIA0701E
Yes or No H
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-758 or EC-764.
No >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR I

2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector (1).
J
- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (2)
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should no exist. K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
L
BBIA0699E
M
2. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 4 and ground with N
Voltage: Battery voltage O

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. P
PBIB3308E




1 49
2 53


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
Perform EC-632.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> GO TO 12.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
With CONSULT-III

2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. A
Without CONSULT-III EC
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness (1) connector.
C
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. D
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. E
>> GO TO 14.
BBIA0701E
F
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. G
>> INSPECTION END H
I
J

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch (2) is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch (1) is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
BBIA0708E

• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T, CVT)
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
BRAKE SW1 (M/T)
(ASCD brake switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T, CVT)
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de- OFF
pressed (M/T)
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC
ABBWA0430GB
P
CAUTION:

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0 V
Approximately 0 V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de-
pressed (M/T)
100 G ASCD brake switch
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T, CVT) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released (11 - 14 V)
(M/T)
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
M/T models
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON
A/T and CVT models
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 100 and ground under the
M/T models
Condition Voltage
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0 V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
A/T and CVT models
Condition Voltage
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0 V PBIB3315E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T and CVT models) >>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Condition Indication A
EC
Without CONSULT-III
lowing conditions. C
Condition Voltage
D
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0 V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
E
PBIB0311E
F
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 11. G
3.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch (1) harness connector.
- Clutch pedal (2)
I
K
BBIA0709E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and L

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or
tester.
M
Condition Voltage
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0 V N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
O
4.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch (2) harness connector.
- Stop lamp switch (1)
BBIA0708E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and


OK or NG
OK (M/T models) >>GO TO 6.
OK (A/T and CVT models) >>GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 100 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. A
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
9.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 100 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. E
10.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-938, "Component Inspection" F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. G
- ASCD brake switch (2)
K
BBIA0708E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. L
PBIB3317E
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
• 10 A fuse

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, and
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. A
Clutch pedal: Fully released. Should exist. EC
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-6, and C
SEC023D
D
STOP LAMP SWITCH
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. E
H
PBIB3318E
Condition Continuity I
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
J

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
• CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD
setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Specification data are reference value.

MAIN switch: Pressed at 1st time
→ 2nd
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
SET LAMP • Vehicle: Between 40 km/h (25
MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF

ASCD INDICATOR
EC
AABWA0231GB
P
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD Indicator Condition Specification

MAIN switch: Pressed at 1st
time → 2nd
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
• Vehicle: Between 40 km/h (25
SET LAMP
MPH) and 144 km/h (89 ASCD: Not operating OFF
MPH)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC UXXXX.
No >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Does combination meter operate normally?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

A
Specification data are reference values. EC

Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting C
ON
switch is in 2nd position.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch
OFF
is OFF.
D
Heater fan: Operating. ON
HEATER FAN SW • Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan: Not operating. OFF
E
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

F
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
G
Condition LOAD SIGNAL
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4. I
2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions. J
Condition LOAD SIGNAL

Rear window defogger switch: ON ON K
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION M
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
Condition HEATER FAN SW N

Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
O
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 6. P
4.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-6 or LT-28.
>> INSPECTION END

5.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-51, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location".
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to MTC-22, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)".
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
A
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM EC
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura- C
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs. D
PBIA9664J E

B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-624. G
INJ PULSE-B1 • Shift lever: P or N (A/T, CVT), H
Neutral (M/T) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load

FUEL INJECTOR
BBWA3003E
CAUTION:

FUEL INJECTOR
TERMI-
WIRE
NO.
COLOR EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at D
idle
E
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
F
G
PBIA4943J
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
1.INSPECTION START I
Turn ignition switch to START.

Is any cylinder ignited? J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3. K
With CONSULT-III
L
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III M
1. Start engine.
N
PBIB3332E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.

FUEL INJECTOR
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector (1) harness connector.
PBIA9870J
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E

• 10 A fuse
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 25, 29, 30, 31.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
Refer to EC-632.

FUEL INJECTOR
>> INSPECTION END
A
FUEL INJECTOR
EC
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
C
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
3. If NG, replace fuel injector.
D
PBIA9579J

F
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-152. G

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second
Engine running and cranking Operates
Engine: Stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds
Except as shown above Stops
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
BBIA0704E

• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
• Except above conditions OFF

FUEL PUMP
EC
AABWA0323GB
P
CAUTION:

FUEL PUMP
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0 V
[Engine is running]
23 GR Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
switch ON

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
- Illustration shows the view with intake air duct removed.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed

hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0712E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9573J
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB3319E

FUEL PUMP

• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
EC
5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III C
3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- D
nector (1).
- Illustration shows the view with inspection hole cover removed.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. E
BBIA0702E G
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. H
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second

after ignition switch is turned ON. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
PBIB0795E
6.CHECK 15 A FUSE K

2. Disconnect 15 A fuse. L
3. Check 15 A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> Replace fuse.
7.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E45. N
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 36 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” termi-
nal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8.

FUEL PUMP
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
9.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
Refer to EC-632.
OK or NG
FUEL PUMP
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
SEC918C
FUEL PUMP

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR EC

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil (1) primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper C
high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
E
PBIB3328E

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA2658E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
tion switch OFF
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA2659E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 0.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
NOTE:
at idle
17 R Ignition signal No. 1 D

0.2 - 0.5 V
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIA9266J
G
H
1.CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running? I
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. J
No >> GO TO 4.
K
With CONSULT-III
L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. N
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 17, 18, 21, 22
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as O
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
P
PBIA9567J
PBIA9265J
OK or NG

IGNITION SIGNAL
NG >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 105 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-633.
PBIA9575J
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect condenser-2 (1) harness connector.
PBIB3329E
4. Check voltage between condenser-2 terminal 1 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser-2 terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-633.
NG >> GO TO 7.

IGNITION SIGNAL
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-2
A
8.CHECK CONDENSER-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC
2. Check harness continuity between condenser-2 terminal 2 and ground.
C
3. Also check harness for short to power. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. E
9.CHECK CONDENSER-2
Refer to EC-1026, "Component Inspection"
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser-2.
G
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. H
3. Disconnect ignition coil (1) harness connector.
I
K
PBIB3328E
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with L

Voltage: Battery voltage M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11. N
PBIB0138E O
P
• Harness connector F8
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F8

12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

IGNITION SIGNAL
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 17, 18, 21, 22 and ignition coil terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
Refer to EC-632.
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ Ω
1 and 3
Except 0 Ω
2 and 3
4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
PBIB0847E

IGNITION SIGNAL
7. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) in IPDM E/R (2) to release fuel pres-
sure. A
NOTE:
sure applies again during the following procedure.
EC
- : Vehicle front
8. Start engine.
pressure. C
11. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- PBIB2958E
cal discharge from the ignition coils. D
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 - E
16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is F
tion.
Spark should be generated. G
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil H
within 50 cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E

• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken. I
NOTE:
functioning. J
17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
CONDENSER-2
3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals 1 and 2.
L
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
4. If NG, replace condenser-2.
M
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005532920 O
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-149. P

The refrigerant pressure sensor (1) is installed at the condenser of

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
• : Vehicle front
BBIA0713E
PBIB2657E

EC
BBWA2662E
P
CAUTION:

TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
(Compressor operates)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
48 BR • Warm-up condition Approximately 0 V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0 V

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9574J

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
BBIA0698E
: Vehicle front
4. Body ground E15
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor (1) harness connector.
- : Vehicle front A
EC
BBIA0713E
D
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> GO TO 4.
G
SEF479Y
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

• Harness for open or short between refrigerant pressure sensor and ECM
I
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT J
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48. K
Continuity should exist. L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N
O
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P
1. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 41.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
Refer to EC-632.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

Refer to MTC-89, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor".

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
A
EC
P
ABBWA0363GB

BBWA2998E

A
Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000005532926
EC
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000005532927

C
A/T No load* (in P or N position)

Target idle speed CVT No load* (In P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm D
M/T No load* (in Neutral position)
A/T In P or N position
E
Air conditioner: ON CVT In P or N position 850 rpm or more
M/T In Neutral position
A/T In P or N position F
Ignition timing CVT In P or N position 13 ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
G
*: Under the following conditions:
H
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000005532928
Calculated load value (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 10 - 35 % J
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35 %
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000005532929

K
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14 V )

L
Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3* V
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
M
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005532930

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 O
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005532931
P
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000005532932
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 1.8 - 2.44 Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000005532933
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4 Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000005532934

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000005532935

Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000005532936
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15 Ω
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000005532937
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.4 - 14.5 Ω
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000005532938
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0 Ω

Nissan Tiida C11 2010 Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan Tiida C11 2010 Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan Tiida C11 2010 Engine Control System PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE

Revision: January 2010 EC-1 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-2 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-3 2010 Versa

P0607 ECM ....................................................... 351 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL

Revision: January 2010 EC-6 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-7 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-9 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-10 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-11 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-12 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-13 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-14 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-15 2010 Versa

*1: Include 1st trip DTC.

Malfunction information, obtained>>GO TO 2.

Revision: January 2010 EC-16 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-17 2010 Versa

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: January 2010 EC-18 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-19 2010 Versa

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

Revision: January 2010 EC-20 2010 Versa

4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING D

Revision: January 2010 EC-21 2010 Versa

11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Revision: January 2010 EC-22 2010 Versa

17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

When replacing ECM, this procedure must be performed. I

Revision: January 2010 EC-23 2010 Versa

1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING

2. Check ignition timing.

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: January 2010 EC-24 2010 Versa

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Re-

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement

>> INSPECTION END

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000005398246

Revision: January 2010 EC-28 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-29 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-30 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-31 2010 Versa

1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R

Revision: January 2010 EC-32 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-33 2010 Versa

Component Description INFOID:0000000005398251

Revision: January 2010 EC-34 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-35 2010 Versa

System Description INFOID:0000000005398253

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

EPS control unit Power steering operation*2

Revision: January 2010 EC-36 2010 Versa

Revision: January 2010 EC-37 2010 Versa

Two types of systems are used.